Zoom out
Zoom in
Vorherige Seite
1/398
Nächste Seite
Seats and Restraint Systems
........................... 1-1
Front Seats
............................................... 1-2
Rear Seats
............................................... 1-5
Safety Belts
.............................................. 1-7
Child Restraints
....................................... 1-25
Airbag System
......................................... 1-45
Restraint System Check
............................ 1-59
Features and Controls
..................................... 2-1
Keys
........................................................ 2-3
Doors and Locks
....................................... 2-8
Windows
................................................. 2-14
Theft-Deterrent Systems
............................ 2-16
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle
........... 2-19
Mirrors
.................................................... 2-31
OnStar
®
System
...................................... 2-34
HomeLink
®
Wireless Control System
........... 2-36
Storage Areas
......................................... 2-41
Sunroof
.................................................. 2-45
Vehicle Personalization
............................. 2-45
Instrument Panel
............................................. 3-1
Instrument Panel Overview
.......................... 3-4
Climate Controls
...................................... 3-20
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators
........ 3-25
Driver Information Center (DIC)
.................. 3-43
Audio System(s)
....................................... 3-56
Driving Your Vehicle
....................................... 4-1
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle
..... 4-2
Towing
................................................... 4-34
Service and Appearance Care
.......................... 5-1
Service
..................................................... 5-3
Fuel
......................................................... 5-4
Checking Things Under the Hood
................. 5-8
All-Wheel Drive
........................................ 5-44
Rear Axle
............................................... 5-45
Front Axle
............................................... 5-46
Headlamp Aiming
..................................... 5-47
Bulb Replacement
.................................... 5-47
Windshield Replacement
........................... 5-51
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
......... 5-51
Tires
...................................................... 5-54
Appearance Care
..................................... 5-85
Vehicle Identification
................................. 5-94
Electrical System
...................................... 5-94
Capacities and Specifications
................... 5-106
Maintenance Schedule
..................................... 6-1
Maintenance Schedule
................................ 6-2
Customer Assistance and Information
.............. 7-1
Customer Assistance and Information
........... 7-2
Reporting Safety Defects
............................ 7-6
Index
................................................................ 1
2005 Saab 9-7X Owner Manual M
2005 - Saab 9-7X Owner Manual
1

Brauchen Sie Hilfe? Stellen Sie Ihre Frage.

Forenregeln

Forum

Suche zurücksetzen

  • Guten Tag! Wie stelle ich bei meinem Saab die Temperaturanzeige von Fahrenheit auf Celsius wieder um?

    Vielen Dank Eingereicht am 20-2-2019 15:18

    Antworten Frage melden

Inhalt der Seiten


  • Page 1

    2005 Saab 9-7X Owner Manual
    Seats and Restraint Systems ........................... 1-1
    Front Seats ............................................... 1-2
    Rear Seats
    ............................................... 1-5
    Safety Belts
    .............................................. 1-7
    Child Restraints
    ....................................... 1-25
    Airbag System
    ......................................... 1-45
    Restraint System Check
    ............................ 1-59
    Features and Controls ..................................... 2-1
    Keys
    ........................................................ 2-3
    Doors and Locks
    ....................................... 2-8
    Windows ................................................. 2-14
    Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................ 2-16
    Starting and Operating Your Vehicle
    ........... 2-19
    Mirrors .................................................... 2-31
    OnStar® System
    ...................................... 2-34
    HomeLink® Wireless Control System ........... 2-36
    Storage Areas
    ......................................... 2-41
    Sunroof
    .................................................. 2-45
    Vehicle Personalization
    ............................. 2-45
    Instrument Panel ............................................. 3-1
    Instrument Panel Overview .......................... 3-4
    Climate Controls
    ...................................... 3-20
    Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators
    ........ 3-25
    Driver Information Center (DIC)
    .................. 3-43
    Audio System(s) ....................................... 3-56

    2005 - Saab 9-7X Owner Manual

    M

    Driving Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-1
    Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle
    ..... 4-2
    Towing
    ................................................... 4-34
    Service and Appearance Care .......................... 5-1
    Service ..................................................... 5-3
    Fuel ......................................................... 5-4
    Checking Things Under the Hood ................. 5-8
    All-Wheel Drive
    ........................................ 5-44
    Rear Axle
    ............................................... 5-45
    Front Axle
    ............................................... 5-46
    Headlamp Aiming ..................................... 5-47
    Bulb Replacement
    .................................... 5-47
    Windshield Replacement
    ........................... 5-51
    Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
    ......... 5-51
    Tires
    ...................................................... 5-54
    Appearance Care
    ..................................... 5-85
    Vehicle Identification
    ................................. 5-94
    Electrical System ...................................... 5-94
    Capacities and Specifications
    ................... 5-106
    Maintenance Schedule ..................................... 6-1
    Maintenance Schedule ................................ 6-2
    Customer Assistance and Information .............. 7-1
    Customer Assistance and Information
    ........... 7-2
    Reporting Safety Defects
    ............................ 7-6
    Index ................................................................ 1



  • Page 2

    Canadian Owners
    A French language copy of this manual can be obtained
    from your dealer or from:
    Helm, Incorporated
    P.O. Box 07130
    Detroit, MI 48207
    Saab Automobile, Saab Cars USA, SAAB, Saab 9-7X,
    9-7X and the Saab Emblem are registered trademarks
    of Saab Automobile, AB.
    This manual includes the latest information at the time it
    was printed. We reserve the right to make changes
    after that time without further notice. For vehicles first
    sold in Canada, substitute the name “General Motors of
    Canada Limited” for Saab Automobile, AB whenever
    it appears in this manual.
    Keep this manual in the vehicle, so it will be there if it is
    needed while you are on the road. If the vehicle is
    sold, leave this manual in the vehicle.

    Litho in U.S.A.
    Part No. 0597X A First Edition

    How to Use This Manual
    Many people read the owner manual from beginning to
    end when they first receive their new vehicle. If this
    is done, it can help you learn about the features
    and controls for the vehicle. Pictures and words work
    together in the owner manual to explain things.

    Index
    A good place to quickly locate information about the
    vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual. It is an
    alphabetical list of what is in the manual and the
    page number where it can be found.

    ©

    2005 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.

    ii

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 3

    Safety Warnings and Symbols
    There are a number of safety cautions in this book. We
    use a box and the word CAUTION to tell about things
    that could hurt you if you were to ignore the warning.

    You will also find a circle
    with a slash through it in
    this book. This safety
    symbol means “Do Not,”
    “Do Not do this” or “Do Not
    let this happen.”

    {CAUTION:
    These mean there is something that could hurt
    you or other people.
    In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.
    Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the
    hazard. Please read these cautions. If you do not,
    you or others could be hurt.

    iii

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 4

    Vehicle Damage Warnings

    Vehicle Symbols

    Also, in this manual you will find these notices:

    The vehicle has components and labels that use
    symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along with
    the text describing the operation or information
    relating to a specific component, control, message,
    gage, or indicator.

    Notice: These mean there is something that could
    damage your vehicle.
    A notice tells about something that can damage the
    vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be covered
    by your vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly. But
    the notice will tell what to do to help avoid the damage.
    When you read other manuals, you might see
    CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in
    different words.
    There are also warning labels on the vehicle. They use
    the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.

    If you need help figuring out a specific name of a
    component, gage, or indicator, reference the following
    topics:









    Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1
    Features and Controls in Section 2
    Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3
    Climate Controls in Section 3
    Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators in Section 3
    Audio System(s) in Section 3
    Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5

    iv

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 5

    These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:

    v

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 6

    ✍ NOTES

    vi

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 7

    Section 1

    Seats and Restraint Systems

    Front Seats ......................................................1-2
    Power Seats ..................................................1-2
    Power Lumbar ...............................................1-2
    Heated Seats .................................................1-3
    Power Reclining Seatbacks ..............................1-4
    Head Restraints .............................................1-5
    Rear Seats .......................................................1-5
    Rear Seat Operation .......................................1-5
    Safety Belts .....................................................1-7
    Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone .................1-7
    Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......1-11
    How to Wear Safety Belts Properly .................1-12
    Driver Position ..............................................1-12
    Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ..................1-18
    Right Front Passenger Position .......................1-19
    Rear Seat Passengers ..................................1-19
    Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ....................1-22
    Safety Belt Pretensioners ...............................1-24
    Safety Belt Extender .....................................1-24
    Child Restraints .............................................1-25
    Older Children ..............................................1-25
    Infants and Young Children ............................1-27
    Child Restraint Systems .................................1-31
    Where to Put the Restraint .............................1-34
    Top Strap ....................................................1-35

    Top Strap Anchor Location .............................1-37
    Lower Anchors and Tethers for
    Children (LATCH) ......................................1-37
    Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
    the LATCH System ....................................1-39
    Securing a Child Restraint in a
    Rear Outside Seat Position .........................1-39
    Securing a Child Restraint in the
    Center Rear Seat Position ..........................1-41
    Securing a Child Restraint in the
    Right Front Seat Position ............................1-42
    Airbag System ...............................................1-45
    Where Are the Airbags? ................................1-47
    When Should an Airbag Inflate? .....................1-50
    What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .......................1-51
    How Does an Airbag Restrain? .......................1-52
    What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? ........1-52
    Passenger Sensing System ............................1-54
    Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...........1-58
    Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
    Vehicle ....................................................1-58
    Restraint System Check ..................................1-59
    Checking the Restraint Systems ......................1-59
    Replacing Restraint System Parts
    After a Crash ............................................1-60

    1-1

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 8

    Front Seats

    Power Lumbar

    Power Seats
    The power seat controls
    are located on the
    outboard side of the front
    seat cushions. The
    horizontal control adjusts
    the seat cushion and
    the vertical control adjusts
    the seatback.

    • Move the front of the horizontal seat control up or
    down to adjust the front portion of the cushion.

    • Move the rear of the horizontal seat control up or
    down to adjust the rear portion of the cushion.

    The seatback lumbar
    support can be adjusted
    by moving the control
    located on the outboard
    side of the seat cushions.

    To increase or decrease support, hold the control
    forward or rearward. Keep in mind that as your
    seating position changes, as it may during long trips,
    so should the position of your lumbar support. Adjust
    the seat as needed.

    • Lift up or push down on the center of the horizontal
    seat control to move the entire seat up or down.

    • To move the seat forward or rearward, slide the
    horizontal seat control forward or rearward.

    • To recline the seatback, press the vertical control
    rearward. To raise the seatback, press the vertical
    control forward. See Power Reclining Seatbacks
    on page 1-4 for more information.
    1-2

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 9

    Heated Seats
    Your vehicle may have
    heated front seats.
    The buttons used to control
    this feature are located
    on the front door armrests.
    The engine must be
    running for the heated seat
    feature to work.

    To heat the entire seat, press the horizontal button with
    the heated seat symbol. Press the button repeatedly
    to cycle through the temperature settings of high,
    medium, low and off. The indicator lights above the
    button will glow to designate the level of heat
    selected: three for high, two for medium, and one for
    low. The low setting warms the seatback and seat
    cushion until the seat temperature is near body
    temperature. The medium and high settings heat the
    seatback and seat cushion to a slightly higher
    temperature. You will be able to feel heat in about
    two minutes.
    To heat only the seatback, press the button with the
    words BACK ONLY. An indicator light on the switch will
    glow to designate that only the seatback is being
    heated. Additional presses will cycle through the heat
    levels for the seatback only.
    The feature will shut off automatically when the ignition
    is turned off.

    1-3

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 10

    Power Reclining Seatbacks
    The vertical power seat control described earlier allows
    the seatback to recline. See Power Seats on page 1-2
    for more information.

    But do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle
    is moving.

    {CAUTION:
    Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle
    is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you
    buckle up, your safety belts cannot do their
    job when you are reclined like this.
    The shoulder belt cannot do its job. In a crash,
    you could go into it, receiving neck or other
    injuries.
    The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a crash
    the belt could go up over your abdomen. The
    belt forces would be there, not at your pelvic
    bones. This could cause serious internal
    injuries.
    For proper protection when the vehicle is in
    motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
    well back in the seat and wear your safety belt
    properly.

    1-4

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 11

    Head Restraints

    Rear Seats
    Rear Seat Operation
    Your vehicle has a 60/40 folding rear seat which lets
    you fold the seatbacks down for more cargo space.

    Adjust your head restraint so that the top of the restraint
    is closest to the top of your head. This position
    reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash.
    The head restraints lock into place when raised.
    To release the head restraint and lower it, press
    the tab located on the top of the seatback.

    Pull up on the loop located where the seat cushion
    meets the seatback to fold the seat cushion up and out
    of the way. This will allow the seatbacks to fold flat
    and increase the cargo area.

    1-5

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 12

    The rear seatback levers
    are located on the
    outboard side of each
    rear seatback.

    Pull the seatback toward you as you lift up on the lever.
    The head restraint will automatically fold out of the
    way when the seatback is folded down.
    To raise the seatback, lift up the seatback and push
    until it locks into the upright position. Push and pull on
    each seatback to make sure they are latched securely.
    Then fold the bottom seat cushion back into place.

    To return the head restraint to the upright position,
    reach behind the seat and pull the restraint up until it
    locks into place. Push and pull on the head restraint to
    make sure that it is latched securely.

    1-6

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 13

    Safety Belts
    Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
    This part of the manual tells you how to use safety
    belts properly. It also tells you some things you should
    not do with safety belts.

    {CAUTION:
    Do not let anyone ride where he or she cannot
    wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a
    crash and you are not wearing a safety belt,
    your injuries can be much worse. You can hit
    things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it.
    You can be seriously injured or killed. In the
    same crash, you might not be, if you are
    buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt,
    and check that your passengers’ belts are
    fastened properly too.

    {CAUTION:
    It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
    area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
    collision, people riding in these areas are more
    likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not
    allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
    that is not equipped with seats and safety
    belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
    seat and using a safety belt properly.

    Your vehicle has a light
    that comes on as a
    reminder to buckle up.
    See Safety Belt Reminder
    Light on page 3-28.

    In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
    says to wear safety belts. Here is why: They work.

    1-7

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 14

    You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have
    a crash, you do not know if it will be a bad one.
    A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
    serious that even buckled up, a person would not
    survive. But most crashes are in between. In many of
    them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes
    walk away. Without belts they could have been badly
    hurt or killed.

    Why Safety Belts Work
    When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
    it goes.

    After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles,
    the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up
    does matter...a lot!

    Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat
    on wheels.

    1-8

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 15

    Put someone on it.

    Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle.
    The rider does not stop.

    1-9

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 16

    The person keeps going until stopped by something.
    In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...

    or the instrument panel...

    1-10

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 17

    Questions and Answers About
    Safety Belts

    Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after an accident
    if I am wearing a safety belt?

    A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety
    belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt, even
    if you are upside down. And your chance of being
    conscious during and after an accident, so you can
    unbuckle and get out, is much greater if you
    are belted.

    Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to
    wear safety belts?
    or the safety belts!
    With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
    You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
    and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why
    safety belts make such good sense.

    A: Airbags are in many vehicles today and will be in
    most of them in the future. But they are supplemental
    systems only; so they work with safety belts — not
    instead of them. Every airbag system ever offered for
    sale has required the use of safety belts. Even if you
    are in a vehicle that has airbags, you still have to
    buckle up to get the most protection. That is true not
    only in frontal collisions, but especially in side and
    other collisions.

    1-11

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 18

    Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from

    Driver Position

    home, why should I wear safety belts?

    A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in an
    accident — even one that is not your fault — you
    and your passengers can be hurt. Being a good
    driver does not protect you from things beyond your
    control, such as bad drivers.
    Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of
    home. And the greatest number of serious injuries
    and deaths occur at speeds of less than
    40 mph (65 km/h).

    Lap-Shoulder Belt
    The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how to wear
    it properly.
    1. Close and lock the door.
    2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight.
    To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.

    Safety belts are for everyone.

    How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
    This part is only for people of adult size.
    Be aware that there are special things to know about
    safety belts and children. And there are different
    rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be
    riding in your vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-25
    or Infants and Young Children on page 1-27. Follow
    those rules for everyone’s protection.
    First, you will want to know which restraint systems your
    vehicle has.

    3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
    Do not let it get twisted.

    We will start with the driver position.

    1-12

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 19

    The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
    across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
    go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
    across you more slowly.
    4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
    Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
    If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
    Extender on page 1-24.
    Make sure the release button on the buckle is
    positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
    safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

    The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
    the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies
    force to the strong pelvic bones. And you would be less
    likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the
    belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
    serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go
    over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of
    the body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
    5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
    shoulder belt.

    The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash,
    or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.

    1-13

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 20

    Q: What is wrong with this?

    {CAUTION:
    You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
    is too loose. In a crash, you would move
    forward too much, which could increase injury.
    The shoulder belt should fit against your body.

    A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give nearly
    as much protection this way.

    1-14

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 21

    Q: What is wrong with this?

    {CAUTION:
    You can be seriously injured if your belt is
    buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,
    the belt would go up over your abdomen.
    The belt forces would be there, not at the
    pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal
    injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
    buckle nearest you.

    A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.

    1-15

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 22

    Q: What is wrong with this?

    {CAUTION:
    You can be seriously injured if you wear the
    shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
    body would move too far forward, which would
    increase the chance of head and neck injury.
    Also, the belt would apply too much force to
    the ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder
    bones. You could also severely injure internal
    organs like your liver or spleen.

    A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm.
    It should be worn over the shoulder at all times.

    1-16

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 23

    Q: What is wrong with this?

    {CAUTION:
    You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.
    In a crash, you would not have the full width of
    the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is
    twisted, make it straight so it can work
    properly, or ask your dealer to fix it.

    A: The belt is twisted across the body.

    1-17

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 24

    Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
    Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
    women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
    seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.

    To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
    The belt should go back out of the way.
    Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the
    way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage both the
    belt and your vehicle.
    A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt,
    and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
    below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
    The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother.
    When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more likely that
    the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For pregnant women,
    as for anyone, the key to making safety belts effective is
    wearing them properly.
    1-18

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 25

    Right Front Passenger Position

    Rear Seat Passengers

    To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s safety
    belt properly, see Driver Position on page 1-12.

    It is very important for rear seat passengers to buckle
    up! Accident statistics show that unbelted people in
    the rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those
    who are wearing safety belts.

    The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same
    way as the driver’s safety belt — except for one thing.
    If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out all the
    way, you will engage the child restraint locking feature.
    If this happens, just let the belt go back all the way and
    start again.

    Rear passengers who are not safety belted can be
    thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike
    others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.

    1-19

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 26

    Lap-Shoulder Belt
    All rear seat positions have lap-shoulder belts.
    Here is how to wear one properly.

    1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
    Do not let it get twisted.
    The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across
    you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt go back
    slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt across you
    more slowly.

    2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
    Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
    When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way,
    it will lock. If it does, let it go back all the way
    and start again. If the belt is not long enough,
    see Safety Belt Extender on page 1-24.
    Make sure the release button on the buckle is
    positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
    safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

    3. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
    shoulder part.

    1-20

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 27

    {CAUTION:
    You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
    is too loose. In a crash, you would move
    forward too much, which could increase injury.
    The shoulder belt should fit against your body.

    The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
    the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies
    force to the strong pelvic bones. And you would be less
    likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the
    belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
    serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go
    over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of
    the body are best able to take belt restraining forces.

    To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.

    1-21

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 28

    Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
    Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide added
    safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown
    booster seats and for some adults. When attached to
    a shoulder belt, the comfort guide positions the belt
    away from the neck and head.

    2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. The elastic
    cord must be under the belt. Then, place the guide
    over the belt and insert the two edges of the belt into
    the slots of the guide.

    There is one guide for each outside passenger position
    in the rear seat. Here is how to attach the comfort
    guide to the shoulder belt.
    1. Slide the guide off of its storage clip located
    between the interior body and the seatback.

    3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
    The elastic cord must be under the belt and the
    guide on top.

    1-22

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 29

    {CAUTION:
    A safety belt that is not properly worn may not
    provide the protection needed in a crash.
    The person wearing the belt could be seriously
    injured. The shoulder belt should go over the
    shoulder and across the chest. These parts of
    the body are best able to take belt restraining
    forces.
    4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt as
    described in Rear Seat Passengers on page 1-19.
    Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the
    shoulder.
    To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze the
    belt edges together so that you can take them out of the
    guides. Slide the guide back onto its storage clip
    located between the interior body and the seatback.

    1-23

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 30

    Safety Belt Pretensioners

    Safety Belt Extender

    Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for the driver
    and right front passenger. Although you cannot see them,
    they are located on the retractor part of the safety belts.
    They help the safety belts reduce a person’s forward
    movement in a moderate to severe frontal, near frontal or
    side crash or a rollover.

    If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you
    should use it.

    Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in a
    crash, you will need to get new ones, and probably other
    new parts for your safety belt system. See Replacing
    Restraint System Parts After a Crash on page 1-60.

    But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer will
    order you an extender. It is free. When you go in to order
    it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the extender
    will be long enough for you. To help avoid personal injury,
    do not let someone else use it, and use it only for the seat
    it is made to fit. The extender has been designed for
    adults. Never use it for securing child seats. To wear it,
    just attach it to the regular safety belt. For more
    information, see the instruction sheet that comes with
    the extender.

    1-24

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 31

    Child Restraints
    Older Children

    Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
    A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt and
    get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can
    provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face
    or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the hips,
    just touching the top of the thighs. It should never be
    worn over the abdomen, which could cause severe
    or even fatal internal injuries in a crash.
    Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
    are restrained in the rear seat.
    In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
    other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
    out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
    belts properly.

    Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
    wear the vehicle’s safety belts.

    1-25

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 32

    Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,
    but the child is so small that the shoulder belt
    is very close to the child’s face or neck?

    A: If the child is sitting in a seat next to a window,
    move the child toward the center of the vehicle.
    Also see Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides on
    page 1-22. If the child is sitting in the center rear
    seat passenger position, move the child toward the
    safety belt buckle. In either case, be sure that
    the shoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder,
    so that in a crash the child’s upper body would
    have the restraint the belts provide.

    {CAUTION:
    Never do this.
    Here two children are wearing the same belt.
    The belt can not properly spread the impact
    forces. In a crash, the two children can be
    crushed together and seriously injured. A belt
    must be used by only one person at a time.

    1-26

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 33

    Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt
    should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching
    the child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s
    pelvic bones in a crash.

    Infants and Young Children
    Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
    infants and all other children. Neither the distance
    traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
    the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
    the law in every state in the United States and in
    every Canadian province says children up to some age
    must be restrained while in a vehicle.

    {CAUTION:

    Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,
    they should have the protection provided by appropriate
    restraints. Young children should not use the vehicle’s
    adult safety belts alone, unless there is no other choice.
    Instead, they need to use a child restraint.

    Never do this.
    Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
    lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
    behind the child. If the child wears the belt in
    this way, in a crash the child might slide under
    the belt. The belt’s force would then be applied
    right on the child’s abdomen. That could cause
    serious or fatal injuries.

    1-27

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 34

    {CAUTION:
    People should never hold a baby in their arms
    while riding in a vehicle. A baby does not
    weigh much — until a crash. During a crash a
    baby will become so heavy it is not possible to
    hold it. For example, in a crash at only
    25 mph (40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby will
    suddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) force on a
    person’s arms. A baby should be secured in
    an appropriate restraint.

    1-28

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 35

    {CAUTION:
    Children who are up against, or very close to,
    any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
    injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts
    offer protection for adults and older children,
    but not for young children and infants. Neither
    the vehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbag
    system is designed for them. Young children
    and infants need the protection that a child
    restraint system can provide.

    1-29

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 36

    Q: What are the different types of add-on child
    restraints?

    {CAUTION:

    A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
    vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
    Selection of a particular restraint should take into
    consideration not only the child’s weight, height,
    and age but also whether or not the restraint will be
    compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will
    be used.
    For most basic types of child restraints, there are
    many different models available. When purchasing
    a child restraint, be sure it is designed to be
    used in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will
    have a label saying that it meets federal motor
    vehicle safety standards.

    Newborn infants need complete support,
    including support for the head and neck. This
    is necessary because a newborn infant’s neck
    is weak and its head weighs so much
    compared with the rest of its body. In a crash,
    an infant in a rear-facing seat settles into the
    restraint, so the crash forces can be
    distributed across the strongest part of an
    infant’s body, the back and shoulders. Infants
    always should be secured in appropriate infant
    restraints.

    The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
    with the restraint state the weight and height
    limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
    there are many kinds of restraints available for
    children with special needs.

    1-30

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 37

    Child Restraint Systems

    {CAUTION:
    The body structure of a young child is quite
    unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom
    the safety belts are designed. A young child’s
    hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s
    regular safety belt may not remain low on the
    hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle
    up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the
    belt would apply force on a body area that is
    unprotected by any bony structure. This alone
    could cause serious or fatal injuries. Young
    children always should be secured in
    appropriate child restraints.
    An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use in a
    motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system designed
    to restrain or position a child on a continuous flat
    surface. Make sure that the infant’s head rests toward
    the center of the vehicle.

    1-31

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 38

    A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with the
    seating surface against the back of the infant.
    The harness system holds the infant in place and,
    in a crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in
    the restraint.

    A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint for
    the child’s body with the harness and also sometimes
    with surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields.

    1-32

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 39

    Q: How do child restraints work?
    A: A child restraint system is any device designed for
    use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or position
    children. A built-in child restraint system is a
    permanent part of the motor vehicle. An add-on
    child restraint system is a portable one, which
    is purchased by the vehicle’s owner.

    A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed to
    improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system. Some
    booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner, and
    some high-back booster seats have a five-point harness.
    A booster seat can also help a child to see out the
    window.

    For many years, add-on child restraints have used
    the adult belt system in the vehicle. To help
    reduce the chance of injury, the child also has to be
    secured within the restraint. The vehicle’s belt
    system secures the add-on child restraint in the
    vehicle, and the add-on child restraint’s harness
    system holds the child in place within the restraint.
    One system, the three-point harness, has straps that
    come down over each of the infant’s shoulders and
    buckle together at the crotch. The five-point harness
    system has two shoulder straps, two hip straps and a
    crotch strap. A shield may take the place of hip
    straps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps that
    are attached to a flat pad which rests low against the
    child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield has
    straps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shield
    that swings up or to the side.

    1-33

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 40

    When choosing a child restraint, be sure the child
    restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is,
    it will have a label saying that it meets federal motor
    vehicle safety standards.
    Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You may
    find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a
    booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system or
    the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children)
    system in your vehicle, but the child also has to be
    secured within the restraint to help reduce the chance of
    personal injury. When securing an add-on child
    restraint, refer to the instructions that come with the
    restraint which may be on the restraint itself or in
    a booklet, or both, and to this manual. The child restraint
    instructions are important, so if they are not available,
    obtain a replacement copy from the manufacturer.

    Where to Put the Restraint
    Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
    are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. We
    recommend that child restraints be secured in a rear
    seat, including an infant riding in a rear-facing infant
    seat, a child riding in a forward-facing child seat and an
    older child riding in a booster seat.
    Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate a
    rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun visor says,
    “Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front.” This
    is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great,
    if the airbag deploys.

    Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move
    around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people
    in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child
    restraint in your vehicle – even when no child is in it.

    1-34

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 41

    {CAUTION:
    A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
    seriously injured or killed if the right front
    passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
    the back of the rear-facing child restraint
    would be very close to the inflating airbag.
    Even though the passenger sensing system is
    designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal
    airbag if the system detects a rear-facing child
    restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no one
    can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
    under some unusual circumstance, even
    though it is turned off. We recommend that
    rear-facing child restraints be secured in the
    rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
    If you need to secure a forward-facing child
    restraint in the right front seat, always move
    the front passenger seat as far back as it will
    go. It is better to secure the child restraint in a
    rear seat.

    Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the child
    restraint properly.
    Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
    move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
    people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
    any child restraint in your vehicle — even when no child
    is in it.

    Top Strap
    Some child restraints have a top strap, or “top tether.”
    It can help restrain the child restraint during a collision.
    For it to work, a top strap must be properly anchored
    to the vehicle. Some top strap-equipped child restraints
    are designed for use with or without the top strap
    being anchored. Others require the top strap always to
    be anchored. Be sure to read and follow the
    instructions for your child restraint. If yours requires that
    the top strap be anchored, do not use the restraint
    unless it is anchored properly.
    If the child restraint does not have a top strap, one can
    be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints.
    Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit
    is available.

    1-35

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 42

    If the position you are using has an adjustable head
    restraint, fold down the head restraint and route the top
    strap under it. See Rear Seat Operation on page 1-5.

    {CAUTION:

    In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
    restraints have a top strap, and that the strap be
    anchored. In the United States, some child restraints
    also have a top strap. If your child restraint has a
    top strap, it should be anchored.
    Anchor the top strap to an anchor point specified in
    Top Strap Anchor Location on page 1-37. Be sure to
    use an anchor point located on the same side of
    the vehicle as the seating position where the child
    restraint will be placed.

    Each top tether bracket is designed to anchor
    only one child restraint. Attaching more than
    one child restraint to a single bracket could
    cause the anchor to come loose or even break
    during a crash. A child or others could be
    injured if this happens. To help prevent injury
    to people and damage to your vehicle, attach
    only one child restraint per bracket.
    Once you have the top strap anchored, you will be
    ready to secure the child restraint itself. Tighten the top
    strap when and as the child restraint manufacturer’s
    instructions say.

    1-36

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 43

    Top Strap Anchor Location

    Lower Anchors and Tethers for
    Children (LATCH)
    Your vehicle has the LATCH system. There are anchors
    in the outside seating positions in the second row.
    This system, designed to make installation of child
    restraints easier, does not use the vehicle’s safety belts.
    Instead, it uses vehicle anchors and child restraint
    attachments to secure the restraints. Some restraints
    also use another vehicle anchor to secure a top
    tether strap.

    Your vehicle has top strap anchors for the rear seating
    positions. The anchors are located on the floor in the rear
    cargo area of your vehicle. Do not use the rear tie-down
    brackets near the liftgate for top strap tethers.
    Do not secure a child restraint in the right front
    passenger’s position if a national or local law requires
    that the top strap be anchored, or if the instructions that
    come with the child restraint say that the top strap
    must be anchored. There is no place to anchor the top
    strap in this position.

    A. Lower Anchorage
    B. Lower Anchorage

    C. Top Tether

    1-37

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 44

    The labels are located above a flap at the base of the
    seatback in the rear outside seating positions. The
    anchors are located under the flap. In order to get to the
    anchors, you will need to pull the strap at the center
    of the seat, where the seat cushion meets the seatback.
    This will allow you to fold the seat cushion up and out
    of the way. Lift the flap to expose the anchors and then
    lower the seat cushion. Be sure the cushion is locked
    into place.

    {CAUTION:
    A. Lower Anchorage
    B. Lower Anchorage
    In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, you
    need a child restraint designed for that system.
    To assist you in locating
    the lower anchors for this
    child restraint system,
    each seating position
    with the LATCH system
    has a label on the
    seatback at each lower
    anchor position.

    If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached
    to its anchorage points, the restraint will not
    be able to protect the child correctly. In a
    crash, the child could be seriously injured or
    killed. Make sure that a LATCH-type child
    restraint is properly installed using the
    anchorage points, or use the vehicle’s safety
    belts to secure the restraint, following the
    instructions that came with that restraint, and
    also the instructions in this manual.

    1-38

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 45

    Securing a Child Restraint Designed
    for the LATCH System
    1. Find the LATCH anchorages for the seating
    position you want to use, where the bottom of
    the seatback meets the back of the seat cushion.
    See Lower Anchors and Tethers for
    Children (LATCH) on page 1-37.
    2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
    3. Attach and tighten the LATCH attachments on the
    child restraint to the LATCH anchorages in the
    vehicle. The child restraint instructions will show
    you how.
    4. If the child restraint is forward-facing, attach and
    tighten the top tether to the top tether anchorage.
    The child restraint instructions will show you
    how. Also see Top Strap on page 1-35.

    Securing a Child Restraint in a
    Rear Outside Seat Position
    If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
    system, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for
    Children (LATCH) on page 1-37.
    If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
    you will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
    child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the
    instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure
    the child in the child restraint when and as the
    instructions say.
    1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
    2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
    portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
    around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
    will show you how.

    5. Push and pull the child restraint in different
    directions to be sure it is secure.
    To remove the child restraint, simply unhook the top
    tether from the top tether anchorage and then
    disconnect the LATCH attachments from the LATCH
    anchorages.

    1-39

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 46

    3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
    positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
    safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

    4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
    the retractor to set the lock.

    1-40

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 47

    6. If your child restraint has a top tether, attach and
    tighten the top tether to the top tether anchor.
    Refer to the instructions that came with the child
    restraint and to Lower Anchors and Tethers
    for Children (LATCH) on page 1-37.
    7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
    directions to be sure it is secure.
    To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
    safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
    belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
    adult or larger child passenger.

    5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
    pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
    lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
    belt back into the retractor. If you are using a
    forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful
    to use your knee to push down on the child
    restraint as you tighten the belt.

    Securing a Child Restraint in the
    Center Rear Seat Position
    Many child restraints are too wide to be correctly
    secured in the center rear seat, although some of them
    will fit there. If the center seat position is too narrow
    for your child restraint, secure it in a rear outside seat
    position.
    If you secure a child restraint in the center seat position,
    follow the instructions in Securing a Child Restraint in
    a Rear Outside Seat Position on page 1-39.

    1-41

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 48

    Securing a Child Restraint in the
    Right Front Seat Position
    Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s airbag. A rear
    seat is a safer place to secure a forward-facing child
    restraint. See Where to Put the Restraint on page 1-34.
    In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensing
    system. The passenger sensing system is designed to
    turn off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag
    when an infant in a rear-facing infant seat or a small
    child in a forward-facing child restraint or booster seat is
    detected. See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-54
    and Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-30
    for more information on this including important
    safety information.
    A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
    child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
    rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.

    {CAUTION:
    A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
    seriously injured or killed if the right front
    passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
    the back of the rear-facing child restraint
    would be very close to the inflating airbag.
    Even though the passenger sensing system is
    designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal
    airbag if the system detects a rear-facing child
    restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no one
    can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
    under some unusual circumstance, even
    though it is turned off. We recommend that
    rear-facing child restraints be secured in the
    rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
    If you need to secure a forward-facing child restraint in
    the right front seat position, move the seat as far
    back as it will go before securing the forward-facing
    child restraint. See Power Seats on page 1-2.
    If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
    system, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for
    Children (LATCH) on page 1-37.

    1-42

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 49

    There is no top tether anchor at the right front seating
    position. Do not secure a child seat in this position
    if a national or local law requires that the top tether be
    anchored or if the instructions that come with the
    child restraint say that the top tether must be anchored.
    See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)
    on page 1-37 if the child restraint has a top tether.

    3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
    portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
    around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
    will show you how.

    You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
    child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the
    instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure
    the child in the child restraint when and as the
    instructions say.
    1. Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s frontal
    airbag. See Passenger Sensing System on
    page 1-54. We recommend that rear-facing child
    restraints be secured in a rear seat, even if
    the airbag is off. If your child restraint is
    forward-facing, move the seat as far back as it will
    go before securing the child restraint in this
    seat. See Power Seats on page 1-2.
    When the passenger sensing system has turned off
    the right front passenger’s frontal airbag, the off
    indicator on the passenger airbag status indicator
    should light and stay lit when you turn the ignition to
    RUN or START. See Passenger Airbag Status
    Indicator on page 3-30.

    4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
    positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
    safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

    2. Put the child restraint on the seat.

    1-43

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 50

    5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
    the retractor to set the lock.

    6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
    pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
    lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
    belt back into the retractor. If you are using a
    forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful
    to use your knee to push down on the child
    restraint as you tighten the belt. You should not be
    able to pull more of the belt from the retractor
    once the lock has been set.
    7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
    directions to be sure it is secure.
    8. If the airbag is off, the off indicator in the inside
    rearview mirror will be lit and stay lit when the
    key is turned to RUN or START.

    1-44

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 51

    If a child restraint has been installed and the on
    indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child
    restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint.
    If after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
    the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make
    sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child
    restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly
    recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat
    cushion if possible. Also make sure the child restraint is
    not trapped under the vehicle head restraint. If this
    happens, adjust the head restraint.
    If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the child
    restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle and
    check with your dealer.

    Airbag System
    Your vehicle has a frontal airbag for the driver and
    another frontal airbag for the right front passenger.
    Your vehicle also has roof-mounted side impact airbags
    designed for either side impact or rollover deployment.
    Roof-mounted side impact airbags are available for
    the driver and the passenger seated directly behind the
    driver and for the right front passenger and the
    passenger seated directly behind that passenger.
    Frontal airbags are designed to help reduce the risk of
    injury from the force of an inflating frontal airbag.
    But these airbags must inflate very quickly to do their
    job and comply with federal regulations.

    To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
    safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
    belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
    adult or larger child passenger.

    1-45

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 52

    Here are the most important things to know about the
    airbag system:

    {CAUTION:
    You can be severely injured or killed in a crash
    if you are not wearing your safety belt — even
    if you have airbags. Wearing your safety belt
    during a crash helps reduce your chance of
    hitting things inside the vehicle or being
    ejected from it. Airbags are “supplemental
    restraints” to the safety belts. All airbags are
    designed to work with safety belts but do not
    replace them.

    CAUTION:

    (Continued)

    The roof-mounted side impact airbags are
    designed to inflate only in moderate to severe
    crashes where something hits the side of your
    vehicle. They are not designed to inflate in
    frontal or in rear crashes. The rollover capable
    airbags have been designed to deploy the
    roof-mounted side impact airbags in the event
    of a vehicle rollover.
    Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety
    belt properly — whether or not there is an
    airbag for that person.

    Frontal airbags for the driver and right front
    passenger are designed to deploy only in
    moderate to severe frontal and near frontal
    crashes. They are not designed to inflate in
    rollover, rear or low-speed frontal crashes, or in
    many side crashes. And, for some unrestrained
    occupants, frontal airbags may provide less
    protection in frontal crashes than more forceful
    airbags have provided in the past.
    CAUTION:

    (Continued)

    1-46

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 53

    The system checks the airbag electrical system for
    malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
    problem. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-29
    for more information.

    {CAUTION:
    Both frontal and roof-mounted airbags inflate
    with great force, faster than the blink of an
    eye. If you are too close to an inflating airbag,
    as you would be if you were leaning forward,
    it could seriously injure you. Safety belts help
    keep you in position for airbag inflation before
    and during a crash. Always wear your safety
    belt even with frontal airbags. The driver
    should sit as far back as possible while still
    maintaining control of the vehicle. Occupants
    should not lean on or sleep against the door.

    Where Are the Airbags?

    There is an airbag
    readiness light on
    the instrument panel
    cluster, which shows the
    airbag symbol.
    The driver’s airbag is in the middle of the steering
    wheel.

    1-47

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 54

    The right front passenger’s airbag is in the instrument
    panel on the passenger’s side.

    The roof-mounted side impact airbag for the driver and
    the person seated directly behind the driver is in the
    ceiling above the side windows.

    1-48

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 55

    {CAUTION:

    The roof-mounted side impact airbag for the right front
    passenger and the person seated directly behind
    that passenger is in the ceiling above the side windows.

    If something is between an occupant and an
    airbag, the bag might not inflate properly or it
    might force the object into that person causing
    severe injury or even death. The path of an
    inflating airbag must be kept clear. Do not put
    anything between an occupant and an airbag,
    and do not attach or put anything on the
    steering wheel hub or on or near any other
    airbag covering. And, because your vehicle
    has roof-mounted side impact airbags, never
    secure anything to the roof of your vehicle by
    routing the rope or tiedown through any door
    or window opening. If you do, the path of an
    inflating side impact airbag will be blocked.
    The path of an inflating airbag must be
    kept clear.

    1-49

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 56

    When Should an Airbag Inflate?
    The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal airbags
    are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal
    or near-frontal crashes. But they are designed to inflate
    only if the impact exceeds a predetermined deployment
    threshold. Deployment thresholds take into account
    a variety of desired deployment and non-deployment
    events and are used to predict how severe a crash
    is likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and help
    restrain the occupants. Whether your frontal airbags
    will or should deploy is not based on how fast your
    vehicle is traveling. It depends largely on what you hit,
    the direction of the impact and how quickly your
    vehicle slows down.
    In addition, your vehicle has “dual stage” frontal airbags,
    which adjust the restraint according to crash severity.
    Your vehicle is equipped with electronic frontal sensors,
    which help the sensing system distinguish between a
    moderate frontal impact and a more severe frontal
    impact. For moderate frontal impacts, these airbags
    inflate at a level less than full deployment. For more
    severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.
    If the front of your vehicle goes straight into a wall
    that does not move or deform, the threshold level for
    the reduced deployment is about 9 to 16 mph
    (14 to 26 km/h), and the threshold level for a full
    deployment is about 18 to 25 mph (29 to 40 km/h).

    (The threshold level can vary, however, with specific
    vehicle design, so that it can be somewhat above
    or below this range.)
    Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.
    For example:

    • If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbags
    could inflate at a different crash speed than if the
    object were moving.

    • If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the
    airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than
    if the vehicle hits an object does not deform.

    • If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole) the
    airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
    than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).

    • If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle the
    airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
    than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.
    The frontal airbags (driver and right front passenger) are
    not intended to inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear
    impacts, or in many side impacts.
    Your vehicle has seat position sensors which enable the
    sensing system to monitor the position of the driver’s
    seat and the right front passenger’s seat. Seat position
    sensors provide information that is used to determine
    if the airbags should deploy at a reduced level or at full
    deployment.

    1-50

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 57

    Your vehicle has roof-mounted side impact airbags and
    a rollover sensor. See Airbag System on page 1-45.
    These “rollover capable” airbags are intended to inflate
    in moderate to severe side crashes or during a
    rollover. A side impact airbag will inflate if the crash
    severity is above the system’s designed “threshold
    level.” The threshold level can vary with specific vehicle
    design. Side impact airbags are not intended to
    inflate in frontal or near-frontal impacts, or rear impacts.
    In any particular crash, no one can say whether an
    airbag should have inflated simply because of the
    damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs
    were. For frontal airbags, inflation is determined by
    what the vehicle hits, the angle of the impact, and how
    quickly the vehicle slows down. For side impact
    airbags, inflation is determined by the location and
    severity of the impact.

    What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
    In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbag sensing
    system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. In the case
    of a “rollover capable” roof-mounted side impact
    airbag, the sensing system detects that the vehicle is
    about to roll over. The sensing system triggers a release
    of gas from the inflator, which inflates the airbag. The
    inflator, airbag, and related hardware are all part of
    the airbag modules inside the steering wheel and in the
    instrument panel in front of the right front passenger.
    For vehicles with roof-mounted side impact airbags,
    the airbag modules are located in the ceiling of
    the vehicle, near the side windows.

    The airbag system is designed to work properly under a
    wide range of conditions, including off-road usage.
    As always, wear your safety belt. See Off-Road Driving
    on page 4-13.

    1-51

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 58

    How Does an Airbag Restrain?
    In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
    even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or
    the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
    collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
    of the vehicle. The airbag supplements the protection
    provided by safety belts. Airbags distribute the force of
    the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper
    body, stopping the occupant more gradually. But the
    frontal airbags would not help you in many types
    of collisions, including rollovers, rear impacts, and many
    side impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motion
    is not toward the airbag. Roof-mounted side impact
    airbags would not help you in many types of collisions,
    including many frontal or near frontal collisions, and
    rear impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motion is
    not toward those airbags. Airbags should never be
    regarded as anything more than a supplement to safety
    belts, and then only in moderate to severe frontal or
    near-frontal collisions for the driver’s and right front
    passenger’s frontal airbags, and only in moderate to
    severe side collisions or rollovers for the roof-mounted
    side impact airbags.

    What Will You See After an Airbag
    Inflates?
    After an airbag inflates, it quickly deflates, so quickly
    that some people may not even realize the airbag
    inflated. Some components of the airbag module — the
    steering wheel hub for the driver’s airbag, the
    instrument panel for the right front passenger’s bag or
    the ceiling of your vehicle near the side windows — will
    be hot for a short time. The parts of the bag that
    come into contact with you may be warm, but not too
    hot to touch. There will be some smoke and dust coming
    from the vents in the deflated airbags. Airbag inflation
    does not prevent the driver from seeing or being able to
    steer the vehicle, nor does it stop people from leaving
    the vehicle.

    1-52

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 59

    {CAUTION:
    When an airbag inflates, there is dust in the
    air. This dust could cause breathing problems
    for people with a history of asthma or other
    breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in
    the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe
    to do so. If you have breathing problems but
    cannot get out of the vehicle after an airbag
    inflates, then get fresh air by opening a
    window or a door. If you experience breathing
    problems following an airbag deployment, you
    should seek medical attention.
    Your vehicle has a feature that will automatically unlock
    the doors and turn the interior lamps on when the
    airbags inflate (if battery power is available). You can
    lock the doors again and turn the interior lamps off
    by using the door lock and interior lamp controls.
    In many crashes severe enough to inflate an airbag,
    windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.

    Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the
    right front passenger airbag.

    • Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an
    airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for
    your airbag system. If you do not get them,
    the airbag system will not be there to help protect
    you in another crash. A new system will include
    airbag modules and possibly other parts. The
    service manual for your vehicle covers the need to
    replace other parts.

    • Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and
    diagnostic module which records information after
    a crash. See Vehicle Data Collection and Event
    Data Recorders on page 7-5.

    • Let only qualified technicians work on your airbag
    system. Improper service can mean that your
    airbag system will not work properly. See your
    dealer for service.
    Notice: If you damage the covering for the driver’s
    or the right front passenger’s airbag, or the side
    impact airbag covering on the ceiling near the side
    windows, the airbag may not work properly. You
    may have to replace the airbag module in the
    steering wheel, both the airbag module and the
    instrument panel for the right front passenger’s
    airbag, or side impact airbag module and ceiling
    covering for roof-mounted side impact airbags.
    Do not open or break the airbag coverings.
    1-53

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 60

    Passenger Sensing System
    Your vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the
    right front passenger’s position. A passenger airbag
    status indicator in the rearview mirror will be visible
    when you turn your ignition key to START or RUN.
    The words ON and OFF or the symbol for on and off,
    will be visible during the system check. When the
    system check is complete, either the word ON or the
    word OFF, or the symbol for on or the symbol for off will
    be visible. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on
    page 3-30.

    Passenger Airbag Status Indicator – Canada
    The passenger sensing system will turn off the right
    front passenger’s frontal airbag under certain conditions.
    The driver’s airbag and the side airbags are not part
    of the passenger sensing system.
    The passenger sensing system works with sensors that
    are part of the right front passenger’s seat and safety
    belt. The sensors are designed to detect the presence
    of a properly-seated occupant and determine if the
    passenger’s frontal airbag should be enabled
    (may inflate) or not.

    Passenger Airbag Status Indicator – United States

    Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
    are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
    General Motors recommends that child restraints
    be secured in a rear seat, including an infant riding in a
    rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a forward-facing
    child seat and an older child riding in a booster seat.

    1-54

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 61

    Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate a
    rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun visor says,
    “Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front.” This
    is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great,
    if the airbag deploys.

    {CAUTION:
    A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
    seriously injured or killed if the right front
    passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
    the back of the rear-facing child restraint
    would be very close to the inflating airbag.
    Even though the passenger sensing system is
    designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal
    airbag if the system detects a rear-facing child
    restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no one
    can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
    under some unusual circumstance, even
    though it is turned off. We recommend that
    rear-facing child restraints be secured in the
    rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
    CAUTION:

    (Continued)

    CAUTION:

    (Continued)

    If you need to secure a forward-facing child
    restraint in the right front seat, always move
    the front passenger seat as far back as it will
    go. It is better to secure the child restraint in a
    rear seat.
    The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off
    the right front passenger’s frontal airbag if:
    • the right front passenger seat is unoccupied
    • the system determines that an infant is present in a
    rear-facing infant seat
    • the system determines that a small child is present
    in a forward-facing child restraint
    • the system determines that a small child is present
    in a booster seat
    • a right front passenger takes his/her weight off of
    the seat for a period of time
    • the right front passenger seat is occupied by a
    smaller person, such as a child who has outgrown
    child restraints
    • or if there is a critical problem with the airbag
    system or the passenger sensing system.

    1-55

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 62

    When the passenger sensing system has turned off the
    passenger’s frontal airbag, the off indicator in the
    rearview mirror will light and stay lit to remind you that
    the airbag is off.
    If a child restraint has been installed and the on
    indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child
    restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint
    following the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
    and refer to Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
    Seat Position on page 1-42.
    If after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the
    vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make
    sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child
    restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly
    recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat
    cushion if possible. Also make sure the child restraint is
    not trapped under the vehicle head restraint. If this
    happens, adjust the head restraint.
    If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the child
    restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle and
    check with your dealer.

    The passenger sensing system is designed to enable
    (may inflate) the right front passenger’s frontal
    airbag anytime the system senses that a person of adult
    size is sitting properly in the right front passenger’s
    seat. When the passenger sensing system has allowed
    the airbag to be enabled, the on indicator will light
    and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is active.
    For some children who have outgrown child restraints
    and for very small adults, the passenger sensing system
    may or may not turn off the right front passenger’s
    frontal airbag, depending upon the person’s seating
    posture and body build. Everyone in your vehicle who
    has outgrown child restraints should wear a safety
    belt properly — whether or not there is an airbag for
    that person.
    If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
    passenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be
    because that person is not sitting properly in the seat.
    If this happens, turn the vehicle off and ask the person to
    place the seatback in the fully upright position, then sit
    upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion, with the
    person’s legs comfortably extended. Restart the vehicle
    and have the person remain in this position for about
    two minutes. This will allow the system to detect that
    person and then enable the passenger’s airbag.

    1-56

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 63

    CAUTION:

    (Continued)

    vehicle serviced promptly, because an
    adult-size person sitting in the right front
    passenger’s seat may not have the protection
    of the frontal airbag. See Airbag Readiness
    Light on page 3-29 for more on this, including
    important safety information.
    Aftermarket equipment, such as seat covers, can affect
    how well the passenger sensing system operates.
    You may want to consider not using seat covers or other
    aftermarket equipment if your vehicle has the passenger
    sensing system. See Adding Equipment to Your
    Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-58 for more
    information about modifications that can affect how the
    system operates.

    {CAUTION:
    If the airbag readiness light in the instrument
    panel cluster ever comes on and stays on, it
    means that something may be wrong with the
    airbag system. If this ever happens, have the
    CAUTION:

    (Continued)

    {CAUTION:
    Stowing of articles under the passenger’s seat
    or between the passenger’s seat cushion and
    seatback may interfere with the proper
    operation of the passenger sensing system.

    1-57

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 64

    Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
    Vehicle
    Airbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
    There are airbag system parts in several places around
    your vehicle. You do not want the system to inflate while
    someone is working on your vehicle. Your dealer and the
    service manual have information about servicing your
    vehicle and the airbag system. To purchase a service
    manual, see Service Publications Ordering Information
    on page 7-7.

    {CAUTION:
    For up to 10 seconds after the ignition key is
    turned off and the battery is disconnected, an
    airbag can still inflate during improper service.
    You can be injured if you are close to an
    airbag when it inflates. Avoid yellow
    connectors. They are probably part of the
    airbag system. Be sure to follow proper
    service procedures, and make sure the person
    performing work for you is qualified to do so.

    Adding Equipment to Your
    Airbag-Equipped Vehicle

    Q: Is there anything I might add to the front or
    sides of the vehicle that could keep the
    airbags from working properly?

    A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s
    frame, bumper system, front end or side sheet
    metal or height, they may keep the airbag system
    from working properly. Also, the airbag system may
    not work properly if you relocate any of the airbag
    sensors. If you have any questions about this,
    you should contact Customer Assistance before you
    modify your vehicle. The phone numbers and
    addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two
    of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this
    manual. See Customer Satisfaction Procedure on
    page 7-2.

    The airbag system does not need regular maintenance.

    1-58

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 65

    Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get my
    vehicle modified. How can I find out whether
    this will affect my airbag system?

    A: Changing or moving any parts of the front seats,
    safety belts, the airbag sensing and diagnostic
    module (located under the driver’s seat), or
    the inside rearview mirror can affect the operation
    of the airbag system. If you have questions,
    call Customer Assistance. The phone numbers
    and addresses for Customer Assistance are
    in Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure
    in this manual. See Customer Satisfaction
    Procedure on page 7-2.

    Restraint System Check
    Checking the Restraint Systems
    Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
    and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors
    and anchorages are working properly. Look for any other
    loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
    anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing
    its job, have it repaired.
    Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a
    crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt
    is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
    Also look for any opened or broken airbag covers, and
    have them repaired or replaced. (The airbag system
    does not need regular maintenance.)

    1-59

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 66

    Replacing Restraint System Parts
    After a Crash

    {CAUTION:
    A crash can damage the restraint systems in
    your vehicle. A damaged restraint system
    may not properly protect the person using it,
    resulting in serious injury or even death in a
    crash. To help make sure your restraint
    systems are working properly after a crash,
    have them inspected and any necessary
    replacements made as soon as possible.
    If you have had a crash, do you need new belts or
    LATCH system parts?
    After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
    But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if
    worn during a more severe crash, then you need
    new parts.

    If the LATCH system was being used during a more
    severe crash, you may need new LATCH system parts.
    If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision
    damage also may mean you will need to have LATCH
    system, safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced.
    New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt
    or LATCH system was not being used at the time of
    the collision.
    If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
    system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier
    in this section.
    If the airbags inflate you will also need to replace the
    driver and front passenger’s safety belt retractor
    assembly. Be sure to do so. Then the new retractor
    assembly will be there to help protect you in a collision.
    After a crash you may need to replace the driver and
    front passenger’s safety belt retractor assemblies, even
    if the airbags have not deployed. The driver and
    front passenger’s safety belt retractor assemblies
    contain the safety belt pretensioners. Have your safety
    belt pretensioners checked if your vehicle has been
    in a collision, or if your airbag readiness light stays on
    after you start your vehicle or while you are driving.
    See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-29.

    1-60

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 67

    Section 2

    Features and Controls

    Keys ...............................................................2-3
    Remote Keyless Entry System .........................2-5
    Remote Keyless Entry System Operation ...........2-6
    Doors and Locks .............................................2-8
    Door Locks ....................................................2-8
    Power Door Locks ..........................................2-9
    Delayed Locking .............................................2-9
    Programmable Automatic Door Locks ..............2-10
    Rear Door Security Locks ..............................2-12
    Lockout Protection ........................................2-12
    Liftgate/Liftglass ............................................2-13
    Windows ........................................................2-14
    Power Windows ............................................2-15
    Sun Visors ...................................................2-15
    Theft-Deterrent Systems ..................................2-16
    Content Theft-Deterrent .................................2-16
    PASS-Key® III ..............................................2-17
    PASS-Key® III Operation ...............................2-18

    Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................2-19
    New Vehicle Break-In ....................................2-19
    Ignition Positions ..........................................2-20
    Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................2-20
    Starting the Engine .......................................2-21
    Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal ................2-22
    Engine Coolant Heater ..................................2-23
    Automatic Transmission Operation ...................2-24
    Parking Brake ..............................................2-27
    Shifting Into Park (P) .....................................2-28
    Shifting Out of Park (P) .................................2-29
    Parking Over Things That Burn .......................2-29
    Engine Exhaust ............................................2-30
    Running the Engine While Parked ...................2-30
    Mirrors ...........................................................2-31
    Manual Rearview Mirror with Compass ............2-31
    Outside Power Mirror ....................................2-33
    Outside Curb View Assist Mirror .....................2-33
    Outside Convex Mirror ...................................2-34
    Outside Heated Mirrors ..................................2-34

    2-1

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 68

    Section 2

    Features and Controls

    OnStar® System .............................................2-34
    HomeLink® Wireless Control System ...............2-36
    HomeLink® Wireless Control System
    Operation .................................................2-37
    Storage Areas ................................................2-41
    Glove Box ...................................................2-41
    Cupholder(s) ................................................2-41
    Overhead Console ........................................2-41

    Center Console Storage Area .........................2-41
    Luggage Carrier ...........................................2-42
    Rear Floor Storage Lid ..................................2-43
    Cargo Cover ................................................2-44
    Cargo Tie Downs ..........................................2-44
    Sunroof .........................................................2-45
    Vehicle Personalization ...................................2-45
    Memory Seat ...............................................2-45

    2-2

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 69

    Keys

    {CAUTION:
    Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
    key is dangerous for many reasons. They could
    operate the power windows or other controls or
    even make the vehicle move. The children or
    others could be badly injured or even killed.
    Do not leave the keys in a vehicle with children.

    2-3

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 70

    This vehicle has one
    double-sided key for the
    ignition and door lock.
    It will fit with either side up.

    The key code number tells your dealer or a qualified
    locksmith how to make extra keys. Keep this number in
    a safe place. If you lose your keys, you’ll be able to have
    new ones made easily using this number. Your selling
    dealer should also have this number.
    Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your vehicle,
    you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.
    Be sure you have spare keys.
    If you ever do get locked out of your vehicle, call the
    Roadside Assistance Center. See Roadside Assistance
    Program on page 7-4.

    When a new vehicle is delivered, the dealer provides
    the owner with a pair of identical keys and a key
    code number.

    If your vehicle is equipped with the OnStar® system with
    an active subscription and you lock your keys inside
    the vehicle, OnStar® may be able to send a command to
    unlock your vehicle. See OnStar® System on page 2-34
    for more information.
    The key can not be removed from the ignition if your
    vehicle does not have power. See Ignition Positions on
    page 2-20 for additional information.

    2-4

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 71

    Remote Keyless Entry System
    Your keyless entry system operates on a radio
    frequency subject to Federal Communications
    Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
    This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
    Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
    1. This device may not cause interference.
    2. This device must accept any interference received,
    including interference that may cause undesired
    operation of the device.
    This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
    Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
    1. This device may not cause interference.
    2. This device must accept any interference received,
    including interference that may cause undesired
    operation of the device.

    At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is
    normal for any remote keyless entry system. If the
    transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer
    to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:

    • Check the distance. You may be too far from your
    vehicle. You may need to stand closer during
    rainy or snowy weather.

    • Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
    be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the
    left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and
    try again.

    • Check to determine if battery replacement is
    necessary. See “Battery Replacement” under
    Remote Keyless Entry System Operation
    on page 2-6.

    • If you are still having trouble, see your dealer or a
    qualified technician for service.

    Changes or modifications to this system by other than
    an authorized service facility could void authorization to
    use this equipment.

    2-5

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 72

    Remote Keyless Entry System
    Operation

    Q (Lock):

    With this system you can lock and unlock your doors
    from about 3 feet (1 m) up to 30 feet (9 m) away
    using the remote keyless entry transmitter supplied with
    your vehicle.

    L (Panic Alarm): Press the horn symbol to make the
    horn sound. The headlamps and taillamps will also flash
    for up to 30 seconds. This can be turned off by pressing
    the horn button again, or by waiting for 30 seconds, or by
    starting the vehicle.

    K (Unlock):

    Press the
    unlock button to
    automatically unlock the
    driver’s door. The parking
    lamps may flash and the
    interior lights will go on.
    Press the unlock button
    again and all remaining
    doors will unlock.

    You can program different feedback settings through the
    Driver Information Center (DIC). For more information
    see Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-43.

    Press the lock button to lock all the doors.
    Press the lock button again within three seconds
    and the horn may chirp.

    Matching Transmitter(s) to Your
    Vehicle
    Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to
    prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.
    If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can
    be purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring
    any remaining transmitters with you when you go to
    your dealer. When the dealer matches the replacement
    transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters
    must also be matched. Once your dealer has coded the
    new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock
    your vehicle. Each vehicle can have a maximum
    of four transmitters matched to it.

    2-6

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 73

    Battery Replacement

    To replace the battery in the remote keyless entry
    transmitter do the following:

    Under normal use, the battery in your remote keyless
    entry transmitter should last about two years.
    The battery is weak if the transmitter will not work at the
    normal range in any location. If you have to get close to
    your vehicle before the transmitter works, it is probably
    time to change the battery.
    The Driver Information Center (DIC) will display a
    KEY FOB # BATTERY LOW message when the
    transmitter battery is low. See “KEY FOB # BATTERY
    LOW” under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-46
    for additional information.
    Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not
    to touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body
    transferred to these surfaces may damage the
    transmitter.

    1. Remove the screw from the back of the remote
    keyless entry cover and gently pry the transmitter
    apart.
    2. Remove and replace the battery with a three-volt
    CR2032 or equivalent battery.
    3. Assemble the transmitter and replace the screw.
    4. Check the operation of the transmitter.

    2-7

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 74

    Doors and Locks

    There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
    You can use the remote keyless entry transmitter or you
    can use your key to unlock your door from the outside.

    Door Locks

    {CAUTION:
    Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
    • Passengers — especially children — can
    easily open the doors and fall out of a
    moving vehicle. When a door is locked,
    the handle will not open it. You increase
    the chance of being thrown out of the
    vehicle in a crash if the doors are not
    locked. So, wear safety belts properly and
    lock the doors whenever you drive.
    • Young children who get into unlocked
    vehicles may be unable to get out. A child
    can be overcome by extreme heat and can
    suffer permanent injuries or even death
    from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
    whenever you leave it.
    • Outsiders can easily enter through an
    unlocked door when you slow down or
    stop your vehicle. Locking your doors
    can help prevent this from happening.

    You can lock or unlock the door from the inside by
    sliding the manual lever forward or rearward.
    The manual lever on each door works only that
    door’s lock.

    2-8

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 75

    Power Door Locks

    Delayed Locking
    The power door lock
    switches are located on
    the driver’s and front
    passenger’s armrests.

    Driver’s Side Switch
    shown, Front
    Passenger’s Side
    Switch similar
    Press the lock symbol to lock all of the doors.
    To unlock the doors, press the other side of the switch.

    This feature delays the locking of the doors and the
    liftgate when using the power lock or the remote keyless
    entry system.
    The first press of the power door lock switch or lock
    button on the remote keyless entry transmitter with the
    driver’s door open will activate the delay locking. A chime
    will sound. All doors and the liftgate can be reopened for
    up to five seconds from the time the last door is closed.
    Five seconds after the last door is closed, all the doors
    will lock. You can lock the doors immediately by
    using the power door lock switch or by pressing the lock
    button on the optional remote keyless entry transmitter
    a second time.
    If the key is inserted in the ignition, this feature will not
    lock the doors. See Lockout Protection on page 2-12.
    You can turn the delayed locking feature on or off.
    If the feature is turned off, the doors will lock immediately
    when a power door lock switch or remote keyless entry
    transmitter lock button is pressed.

    2-9

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 76

    Programming Delayed Locking
    To turn the delayed locking feature on or off, do the
    following:
    1. Press and hold the power door lock switch on the
    driver’s door in the lock position.
    2. Press the remote keyless entry transmitter unlock
    button twice.
    If the delayed locking feature was on, it will now be off.
    If the feature was off, it will now be on.

    Programmable Automatic
    Door Locks
    Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic lock/unlock
    feature which enables you to program your vehicle’s
    power door locks. You can program this feature through
    the Driver Information Center (DIC), or by the following
    method. See DIC Vehicle Customization on page 3-50.

    Programmable Locking Feature
    Following are the two locking modes that can be
    programmed:
    Mode 1: All doors lock when the transmission is shifted
    out of PARK (P).
    Mode 2: All doors lock when the vehicle speed is greater
    than 8 mph (13 km/h).

    The automatic door locks were pre-programmed at the
    factory to lock all the doors when the transmission
    is shifted into gear. The following instructions detail how
    to program your door locks differently than the factory
    setting. Choose one of the two programming options
    listed previously before entering the program mode.
    To enter the program mode, do the following:
    1. Begin with the ignition off. Then pull the turn
    signal/multifunction lever toward you and hold
    it there while you perform the next step.
    2. Turn the key to RUN and LOCK twice. Then, with the
    key in LOCK, release the turn signal/multifunction
    lever. Once you do this, you will hear the lock switch
    lock and unlock, the horn will chirp twice, and a
    30-second program timer will begin.
    3. You are now ready to program the automatic door
    locks. Select one of the two programming options
    listed previously, and press the lock side of
    the power door lock switch to cycle through the
    lock options. You will have 30 seconds to
    begin programming. If you exceed the 30-second
    limit, the locks will automatically lock and
    unlock and the horn will chirp twice to indicate
    that you have left the program mode. If this
    occurs, repeat the procedure beginning with
    Step 1 to re-enter the programming mode.

    2-10

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 77

    You can exit the program mode any time by turning the
    ignition to RUN. The locks will automatically lock and
    unlock and the horn will chirp twice to indicate that you
    are leaving the program mode. If the lock/unlock switches
    are not pressed while in the programming mode, the
    current auto lock/unlock setting will not be modified.
    See your dealer for more information.

    Programmable Unlocking Feature
    The following is the list of available programming options:
    Mode 1: All doors unlock when the transmission is
    shifted into PARK (P).
    Mode 2: Driver’s door unlocks when the transmission is
    shifted into PARK (P).
    Mode 3: All doors unlock when the key is removed
    from the ignition.
    Mode 4: No automatic door unlock.
    The automatic door locks were pre-programmed at the
    factory to unlock all doors once the transmission is shifted
    to PARK (P). The following instructions detail how to
    program your door locks differently than the factory
    setting. Choose one of the four programming options
    listed previously before entering the program mode.

    To enter the program mode you need to do the following:
    1. Begin with the ignition off. Then pull the turn
    signal/multifunction lever toward you and hold
    it there while you perform the next step.
    2. Turn the key to RUN and LOCK twice. Then, with the
    key in LOCK, release the turn signal/multifunction
    lever. Once you do this, you will hear the lock switch
    lock and unlock, the horn will chirp twice, and a
    30-second program timer will begin.
    3. You are now ready to program the automatic door
    locks. Select one of the four programming options
    listed above, and press the unlock side of the power
    door lock switch to cycle through the unlocking
    options. You will have 30 seconds to begin
    programming. If you exceed the 30-second limit,
    the locks will automatically lock and unlock and the
    horn will chirp twice to indicate that you have left
    the program mode. If this occurs, repeat the
    procedure beginning with Step 1 to re-enter the
    programming mode.
    You can exit the program mode any time by turning the
    ignition to RUN. The locks will automatically lock and
    unlock and the horn will chirp twice to indicate that you
    are leaving the program mode. If the lock/unlock switches
    are not pressed while in the programming mode, the
    current auto lock/unlock setting will not be modified.
    See your dealer for more information.
    2-11

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 78

    Rear Door Security Locks

    Lockout Protection

    Your vehicle may have this feature. You can lock the rear
    doors so they cannot be opened from the inside by
    passengers. To use one of these locks do the following:

    This feature stops the power door locks from locking
    when the key is in the ignition and a door is open
    to protect you from locking your key in the vehicle.

    1. Open one of the rear doors. You will find a
    security lock lever located on the inside
    edge of each rear door.
    2. Move the lever down to
    engage the security
    lock. Move the lever up
    to disengage the
    security lock.

    If the power lock switch is pressed when a door is open
    and the key is in the ignition, all the doors will lock and
    then the driver’s door will unlock.

    3. Close the door.
    The rear doors of your vehicle cannot be opened from
    the inside while this feature is in use. If you want to open
    the rear door while the security lock is on, unlock the
    door and open the door from the outside.

    2-12

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 79

    Liftgate/Liftglass

    {CAUTION:
    It can be dangerous to drive with the liftgate or
    liftglass open because carbon monoxide (CO)
    gas can come into your vehicle. You cannot see
    or smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness and
    even death. If you must drive with the liftgate
    open or if electrical wiring or other cable
    connections must pass through the seal
    between the body and the liftgate or liftglass:
    • Make sure all other windows are shut.
    • Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
    system to its highest speed and select
    the control setting that will force outside
    air into your vehicle. See “Climate Control
    System” in the Index.
    • If you have air outlets on or under the
    instrument panel, open them all the way.
    See Engine Exhaust on page 2-30.

    Liftgate Release
    To unlock the liftgate, you may use the power door locks
    or the remote keyless entry system described earlier.
    The liftglass will also unlock when the liftgate is
    unlocked. Press the button on the liftglass to open.
    To open the entire liftgate, lift the handle located in the
    center of the liftgate. If you open the liftgate, the
    liftgate module will lock the liftglass after a one to
    two second delay.

    Emergency Release for Opening
    Liftgate
    1. Remove the trim plug, located on the inside of the
    liftgate in the center, to expose the access hole in
    the trim panel.
    2. Use a tool to reach through the access hole in the
    trim panel.
    3. Pry the left release lever up to the unlock position.
    Pry the right release lever up to unlatch the liftgate.
    4. Reinstall the trim plug.

    2-13

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 80

    Windows

    {CAUTION:
    Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
    vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
    They can be overcome by the extreme heat and
    suffer permanent injuries or even death from
    heat stroke. Never leave a child, a helpless
    adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle, especially with
    the windows closed in warm or hot weather.

    2-14

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 81

    Power Windows

    Express-Down Window
    AUTO (Express-down): The driver’s and front
    passenger’s window switches have an express-down
    feature that allows you to lower the window without
    holding the switch down. Press down briefly on the
    driver’s or front passenger’s window switch labeled
    AUTO to activate the express-down feature. Lightly tap
    the switch to open the window slightly. The express-down
    feature can be interrupted at any time by pressing the top
    of the switch.

    Window Lockout

    The controls for the power windows are located on the
    armrest on each of the side doors. With power windows,
    the switches operate the windows when the ignition is in
    RUN, ACCESSORY or when Retained Accessory Power
    (RAP) is active. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
    on page 2-20. The driver’s door also has a switch for
    each of the passenger’s windows.
    Press down the top of the switch to lower the window and
    pull up on the switch to raise the window. If you hold the
    switch down for three to seven seconds after the window
    has been completely lowered or raised, the window will
    not operate for about 15 seconds.

    o (Lockout): Your vehicle has a lockout feature to
    prevent passengers from operating the power windows.
    The lockout switch is located in front of the window
    switches on the driver’s door. A light in the lockout
    switch will come on to show that the switch has been
    activated. Press the lockout switch again to return
    to normal operation.

    Sun Visors
    To block out glare, you can pull the visor down.
    You can also slide the visor along the rod from
    side-to-side to cover the driver or passenger front
    window.

    2-15

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 82

    Visor Vanity Mirror

    Here is how to operate the system:

    Pull the sun visor down to expose the vanity mirror.

    1. Open the door.

    Lighted Visor Vanity Mirror

    2. Lock the door with the power door lock switch or
    the remote keyless entry transmitter. The security
    light should flash.

    Your vehicle may have this feature. Pull the sun visor
    down and lift the mirror cover to turn on the lamps.
    The lamps will turn off when the cover is closed.

    Theft-Deterrent Systems
    Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
    Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent
    features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it
    impossible to steal.

    Content Theft-Deterrent
    Your vehicle is equipped
    with a content
    theft-deterrent alarm
    system.

    3. Close all doors. The security light should turn off
    after approximately 30 seconds. The alarm is not
    armed until the security light turns off.
    If a locked door is opened without the key or the remote
    keyless entry transmitter, the alarm will go off. The
    headlamps and parking lamps will flash for two minutes,
    and the horn will sound for 30 seconds, then will turn off
    to save the battery power.
    Remember, the theft-deterrent system will not activate if
    you lock the doors with a key or use the manual door
    lock. It activates only if you use a power door lock switch
    with the door open, or with the remote keyless entry
    transmitter. You should also remember that you can start
    your vehicle with the correct ignition key if the alarm has
    been set off.

    2-16

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 83

    Here is how to avoid setting off the alarm by accident:

    • If you do not want to activate the theft-deterrent
    system, the vehicle should be locked with the
    door key after the doors are closed.

    • Always unlock a door with a key, or use the remote
    keyless entry transmitter. Unlocking a door any other
    way will set off the alarm.
    If you set off the alarm by accident, unlock any door with
    the key. You can also turn off the alarm by pressing
    unlock on the remote keyless entry transmitter. The alarm
    will not stop if you try to unlock a door any other way.

    Testing the Alarm
    The alarm can be tested by following these steps:
    1. From inside the vehicle, lower the driver’s window
    and open the driver’s door.
    2. Activate the system by locking the doors with the
    power door lock switch while the door is open,
    or with the remote keyless entry transmitter.
    3. Get out of the vehicle, close the door and wait for
    the security light to go out.
    4. Then reach in through the window, unlock the door
    with the manual door lock and open the door.
    This should set off the alarm.

    If the alarm does not sound when it should but the
    headlamps flash, check to see if the horn works.
    The horn fuse may be blown. To replace the fuse,
    see Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-95.
    If the alarm does not sound or the headlamps do not
    flash, the vehicle should be serviced by your dealer.

    PASS-Key® III
    Your PASS-Key® III system operates on a radio
    frequency subject to Federal Communications
    Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
    This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
    Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
    1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
    2. This device must accept any interference received,
    including interference that may cause undesired
    operation.
    This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
    Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
    1. This device may not cause interference.
    2. This device must accept any interference received,
    including interference that may cause undesired
    operation of the device.

    When the alarm is set the power door unlock switch is
    not operational.
    2-17

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 84

    Changes or modifications to this system by other than
    an authorized service facility could void authorization to
    use this equipment.
    PASS-Key® III uses a radio frequency transponder in
    the key that matches a decoder in your vehicle.

    PASS-Key® III Operation
    Your vehicle is equipped
    with the PASS-Key® III
    (Personalized Automotive
    Security System)
    theft-deterrent system.
    PASS-Key® III is a passive
    theft-deterrent system.

    The starter will not work and fuel will stop being delivered
    to the engine. Anyone using a trial-and-error method to
    start the vehicle will be discouraged because of the high
    number of electrical key codes.
    When trying to start the vehicle, if the engine does not
    start and the SECURITY light comes on, the key may
    have a damaged transponder. Turn the ignition off and
    try again.
    If the engine still does not start, and the key appears to be
    undamaged, try another ignition key. At this time, you
    may also want to check the fuse. See Fuses and Circuit
    Breakers on page 5-95. If the engine still does not start
    with the other key, your vehicle needs service. If your
    vehicle does start, the first key may be faulty. See your
    dealer who can service the PASS-Key® III to have a new
    key made.
    It is possible for the PASS-Key® III decoder to learn
    the transponder value of a new or replacement key.
    Up to 10 keys may be programmed for the vehicle.
    This procedure is for programming additional keys only.

    This means you do not have to do anything different to
    arm or disarm the system. It works when you insert or
    remove the key from the ignition.
    When the PASS-Key® III system senses that someone is
    using the wrong key, it shuts down the vehicle’s starter
    and fuel systems.

    Canadian Owners: If you lose or damage your keys,
    only a GM dealer can service PASS-Key® III to
    have new keys made. To program additional keys you
    will require two current driver’s keys. You must add
    a step to the following procedure. After Step 2 repeat
    Steps 1 and 2 with the second current driver’s key.
    Then continue with Step 3.

    2-18

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 85

    1. Verify that the new key has PK3 stamped on it.

    Starting and Operating Your
    Vehicle

    2. Insert the current driver’s key in the ignition
    and start the engine. If the engine will not start,
    see your dealer for service.

    New Vehicle Break-In

    To program the new key, do the following:

    3. After the engine has started, turn the key to OFF,
    and remove the key.
    4. Insert the key to be programmed and turn it to ON
    within 10 seconds of removing the previous key.

    Notice: Your vehicle does not need an elaborate
    break-in. But it will perform better in the long run
    if you follow these guidelines:

    • Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or less for
    the first 500 miles (805 km).

    5. The SECURITY light will turn off once the key has
    been programmed. It may not be apparent that the
    SECURITY light went on due to how quickly the
    key is programmed.

    • Do not drive at any one speed, fast or slow,

    6. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys are to
    be programmed.

    • Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles

    If you are ever driving and the SECURITY light comes on
    and stays on, you will be able to restart your engine if you
    turn it off. Your PASS-Key® III system, however, is not
    working properly and must be serviced by your dealer.
    Your vehicle is not protected by the PASS-Key® III
    system at this time.
    If you lose or damage a PASS-Key® III key, see your
    dealer to have a new key made.

    for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do not make
    full-throttle starts.
    (322 km) or so. During this time your new brake
    linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops with new
    linings can mean premature wear and earlier
    replacement. Follow this breaking-in guideline
    every time you get new brake linings.

    • Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See Towing a
    Trailer on page 4-35 for more information.

    2-19

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 86

    Ignition Positions
    Use the key to turn
    the ignition switch to
    four different positions.
    The ignition switch
    is located on the center
    console.

    ACC (Accessory): This position lets you use things
    like the radio and the windshield wipers when the
    engine is off.
    Notice: Lengthy operation of features such as the
    radio in the accessory ignition position may drain
    the battery and prevent your vehicle from starting.
    Do not operate your vehicle in the accessory ignition
    position for a long period of time.

    R (RUN):

    This is the position for driving.

    / (START):

    This position starts the engine.

    Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
    9 (OFF/LOCK):

    This position locks the ignition and
    transmission. It is a theft-deterrent feature. You will only
    be able to remove the key when the ignition is turned
    to OFF/LOCK and the vehicle has power.

    Your vehicle is equipped with a Retained Accessory
    Power (RAP) feature which will allow certain features
    of your vehicle to continue to work up to 10 minutes after
    the ignition key is turned to OFF/LOCK.

    Notice: Using a tool to force the key from the
    ignition switch could cause damage or break the key.
    Use the correct key and turn the key only with your
    hand. Make sure the key is all the way in. If it is, turn
    the steering wheel left and right while you turn the
    key hard. If none of this works, then your vehicle
    needs service.

    Your radio, power windows, DVD player, sunroof (option)
    and overhead console will work when the ignition key is in
    RUN or ACCESSORY. Once the key is turned from RUN
    to OFF/LOCK, these features will continue to work for up
    to 10 minutes or until a door is opened.

    2-20

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 87

    Starting the Engine

    When starting your engine in very cold weather
    (below 0°F or −18°C), do this:

    Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
    Your engine will not start in any other position — that is
    a safety feature. To restart when you are already
    moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.

    1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
    ignition key to START and hold it there up to
    15 seconds. When the engine starts, let go of
    the key.

    Notice: Do not try to shift to PARK (P) if your
    vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage
    the transmission. Shift to PARK (P) only when
    your vehicle is stopped.

    2. If your engine still will not start, or starts but then
    stops, it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
    Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the
    floor and holding it there as you hold the key in
    START for about three seconds. When the engine
    starts, let go of the key and accelerator. If the
    vehicle starts briefly but then stops again, do the
    same thing, but this time keep the pedal down
    for five or six seconds. This clears the extra
    gasoline from the engine.

    1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
    ignition key to START. When the engine starts,
    let go of the key. The idle speed will go down as
    your engine gets warm.
    Notice: Holding your key in START for longer than
    15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to be
    drained much sooner. And the excessive heat can
    damage your starter motor. Wait about 15 seconds
    between each try to help avoid draining your battery
    or damaging your starter.
    2. If it does not start within 10 seconds, push the
    accelerator pedal all the way to the floor, while you
    hold the ignition key in START. When the engine
    starts, let go of the key and let up on the accelerator
    pedal. Wait about 15 seconds between each try.

    Notice: Your engine is designed to work with the
    electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
    parts or accessories, you could change the way the
    engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
    check with your dealer. If you do not, your engine
    might not perform properly. Any resulting damage
    would not be covered by your vehicle’s warranty.

    2-21

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 88

    Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal
    If your vehicle has this feature, you can change
    the position of the throttle and brake pedals.
    This feature is designed for shorter drivers,
    since the pedals cannot move farther away from the
    standard position, but can move closer for better
    pedal reach. This feature can be programmed to work
    with the memory function, if equipped, on your
    vehicle. See Memory Seat on page 2-45.

    The switch used to adjust
    the pedals is located on
    the steering column.

    The vehicle must be in PARK (P) for this feature to
    operate.
    Press the switch forward or backward to move the
    pedals closer of farther away from you.

    2-22

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 89

    Engine Coolant Heater
    If your vehicle has an engine coolant heater. In very
    cold weather, 0°F (−18°C) or colder, the engine coolant
    heater can help. You will get easier starting and
    better fuel economy during engine warm-up. Usually,
    the coolant heater should be plugged in a minimum
    of four hours prior to starting your vehicle. At
    temperatures above 32°F (0°C), use of the coolant
    heater is not required.

    To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
    1. Turn off the engine.
    2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
    The cord is located on the driver’s side of the
    engine compartment, behind the battery.
    3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-Volt AC outlet.

    {CAUTION:
    Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
    could cause an electrical shock. Also, the
    wrong kind of extension cord could overheat
    and cause a fire. You could be seriously injured.
    Plug the cord into a properly grounded
    three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will
    not reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
    extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
    4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
    store the cord as it was before to keep it away
    from moving engine parts. If you do not, it could
    be damaged.
    How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged in?
    The answer depends on the outside temperature,
    the kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead of
    trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact your
    dealer in the area where you will be parking your vehicle.
    The dealer can give you the best advice for that
    particular area.

    2-23

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 90

    Automatic Transmission Operation

    {CAUTION:
    It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the
    shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
    parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.

    There are several different positions for your gear
    shift lever.
    PARK (P): This position locks the rear wheels. It is the
    best position to use when you start the engine because
    your vehicle cannot move easily.

    Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is
    running unless you have to. If you have left the
    engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
    You or others could be injured. To be sure your
    vehicle will not move, even when you are on
    fairly level ground, always set your parking
    brake and move the shift lever to PARK (P).
    See Shifting Into Park (P) on page 2-28.
    If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer
    on page 4-35.
    Ensure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before starting
    the engine. Your vehicle has an automatic transmission
    shift lock control system.

    2-24

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 91

    You have to fully apply the regular brakes before you can
    shift from PARK (P) when the ignition key is in RUN.
    If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on the
    shift lever, press the button on the shift lever and push
    the shift lever all the way into PARK (P) as you maintain
    brake application. Move the shift lever into the gear you
    wish. See Shifting Out of Park (P) on page 2-29.
    REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
    Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
    is moving forward could damage the transmission.
    The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
    Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
    stopped.
    To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow, ice
    or sand without damaging your transmission, see If Your
    Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow on page 4-28.
    NEUTRAL (N): In this position, the engine does not
    connect with the wheels. To restart when you are
    already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.

    {CAUTION:
    Shifting into a drive gear while your engine is
    running at high speed is dangerous. Unless
    your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, your
    vehicle could move very rapidly. You could lose
    control and hit people or objects. Do not shift
    into a drive gear while your engine is running at
    high speed.
    Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)
    with the engine running at high speed may damage
    the transmission. The repairs would not be
    covered by your warranty. Be sure the engine is not
    running at high speed when shifting your vehicle.

    2-25

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 92

    DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving. If you
    need more power for passing, and you are:

    • Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h),
    push the accelerator pedal about halfway down.

    • Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more,
    push the accelerator all the way down.
    You will shift down to the next gear and have
    more power.
    DRIVE (D) can be used when towing a trailer, carrying a
    heavy load, driving on steep hills or for off-road driving.
    You may want to shift the transmission to THIRD (3) or,
    if necessary, a lower gear selection if the transmission
    shifts too often.
    THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal driving.
    However, it offers more power and lower fuel economy
    than DRIVE (D).

    SECOND (2): This position gives you more power but
    lower fuel economy than THIRD (3). You can use
    SECOND (2) on hills. It can help control your speed as
    you go down steep mountain roads, but then you would
    also want to use the brakes off and on.
    You can also use SECOND (2) for starting the vehicle
    from a stop on slippery road surfaces.
    FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power but
    lower fuel economy than SECOND (2). You can use it on
    very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the gear shift
    lever is put in FIRST (1) while the vehicle is moving
    forward, the transmission will not shift into first gear until
    the vehicle is going slowly enough.
    Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in
    one place on a hill using only the accelerator pedal
    may damage the transmission. If you are stuck, do
    not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill, use the
    brakes to hold the vehicle in place.

    2-26

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 93

    Parking Brake
    To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal
    down with your foot and pull up on the parking brake lever
    located between the seats. If the ignition is on, the brake
    system warning light on the instrument panel cluster will
    come on. See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-33.

    To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake
    pedal down. Pull the parking brake lever up until you can
    press in the button at the end of the lever. Hold the button
    in as you move the parking brake lever all the way down.
    Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
    overheat the brake system and cause premature
    wear or damage to brake system parts. Verify that
    the parking brake is fully released and the brake
    warning light is off before driving.
    If you are towing a trailer and you must park on a hill,
    see Towing a Trailer on page 4-35.

    2-27

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 94

    Shifting Into Park (P)

    {CAUTION:
    It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
    the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
    parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
    If you have left the engine running, the vehicle
    can move suddenly. You or others could be
    injured. To be sure your vehicle will not move,
    even when you are on fairly level ground, use
    the steps that follow. If you are pulling a trailer,
    see Towing a Trailer on page 4-35.
    1. Hold the brake pedal down with your foot and set
    the parking brake.
    2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by pressing the
    button on the shift lever and pushing the lever all
    the way toward the front of the vehicle.
    3. Turn the ignition key to OFF/LOCK.
    4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
    leave your vehicle with the key, your vehicle is
    in PARK (P).

    Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine
    Running

    {CAUTION:
    It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with
    the engine running. Your vehicle could move
    suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in
    PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.
    And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine
    running, it could overheat and even catch fire.
    You or others could be injured. Do not leave
    your vehicle with the engine running.
    If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine running,
    be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and your parking
    brake is firmly set before you leave it. After you have
    moved the shift lever into PARK (P), hold the regular
    brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move the shift
    lever away from PARK (P) without first pressing the
    button on the console shift lever. If you can, it means that
    the shift lever was not fully locked into PARK (P).

    2-28

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 95

    Torque Lock

    Parking Over Things That Burn

    If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift your
    transmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the
    vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in the
    transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the shift lever
    out of PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.” To prevent
    torque lock, set the parking brake and then shift into
    PARK (P) properly before you leave the driver’s seat.
    To find out how, see Shifting Into Park (P) on page 2-28.
    When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
    PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
    If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
    vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the
    pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission,
    so you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).

    Shifting Out of Park (P)
    Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock
    control system. You have to fully apply the regular
    brakes before you can shift from PARK (P) when the
    ignition is in RUN. See Automatic Transmission
    Operation on page 2-24.

    {CAUTION:
    Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
    parts under your vehicle and ignite. Do not
    park over papers, leaves, dry grass or other
    things that can burn.

    2-29

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 96

    Engine Exhaust

    {CAUTION:
    Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas
    carbon monoxide (CO), which you cannot see or
    smell. It can cause unconsciousness and death.
    You might have exhaust coming in if:
    • Your exhaust system sounds strange or
    different.
    • Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
    • Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
    • Your vehicle was damaged when driving
    over high points on the road or over road
    debris.
    • Repairs were not done correctly.
    • Your vehicle or exhaust system had been
    modified improperly.
    If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into your
    vehicle:
    • Drive it only with all the windows down to
    blow out any CO; and
    • Have your vehicle fixed immediately.

    Running the Engine While Parked
    It is better not to park with the engine running.
    But if you ever have to, here are some things to know.

    {CAUTION:
    Idling the engine with the climate control
    system off could allow dangerous exhaust into
    your vehicle. See the earlier caution under
    Engine Exhaust on page 2-30.
    Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
    carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if
    the climate control fan is at the highest setting.
    One place this can happen is a garage.
    Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily.
    NEVER park in a garage with the engine
    running.
    Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.
    See Winter Driving on page 4-24.

    2-30

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 97

    Mirrors

    {CAUTION:
    It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
    the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
    parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
    Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is
    running unless you have to. If you have left the
    engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
    You or others could be injured. To be sure your
    vehicle will not move, even when you are on
    fairly level ground, always set your parking
    brake and move the shift lever to PARK (P).
    Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will not
    move. See Shifting Into Park (P) on page 2-28.
    If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on
    page 4-35.

    Manual Rearview Mirror with
    Compass
    The vehicle may have a manual rearview mirror with an
    eight-point compass display located in the upper right
    portion of the mirror.

    Mirror Operation
    While sitting in a comfortable position, adjust the rearview
    mirror so you can see clearly behind your vehicle. Grip it
    in the center and move it up or down and side to side.
    The day/night control, located at the bottom of the mirror,
    adjusts the mirror to reduce headlamp glare from behind
    during evening or dark conditions. Rotate the control to
    the right for night time use; rotate it to the left for day use.

    Compass Display
    P (On/Off): Press this button to turn the compass on
    or off. The compass display, can show a maximum of two
    characters. For example, NE is displayed for north-east.
    When the ignition and the compass/temperature feature
    are on, character boxes will appear for about
    two seconds. After two seconds, the mirror will display
    the direction the vehicle is facing.
    2-31

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 98

    Compass Calibration
    When on, the compass automatically calibrates as the
    vehicle is driven. If, after two seconds, the display does
    not show a compass direction, (N for North, for example),
    there may be a strong magnetic field interfering with the
    compass. Such interference may be caused by a
    magnetic antenna mount, magnetic note pad holder, or a
    similar magnetic item. If the letter C should ever appear in
    the compass window, the compass may need calibration.

    To adjust for compass variance do the following:
    1. Find the current location and variance zone number
    on the following zone map.

    Press and hold the on/off button for nine seconds to
    activate the compass calibration mode. CAL will
    be displayed in the compass window on the mirror.
    The mirror can be calibrated by driving the vehicle in
    circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the display shows
    a direction.

    Compass Variance
    Compass variance is the difference between earth’s
    magnetic north and true geographic north. The mirror is
    set to zone eight upon leaving the factory. It will be
    necessary to adjust the compass to compensate for
    compass variance if you live outside zone eight. Under
    certain conditions, such as during a long-distance,
    cross-country trip, it will be necessary to adjust for
    compass variance. If not adjusted to account for compass
    variance, the compass could give false readings.

    2. Press and hold the on/off button until a zone
    number appears in the display.
    3. Once a zone number appears in the display, press
    the on/off button quickly until the correct zone
    number appears in the display. If C appears in the
    compass window, the compass may need
    calibration. See “Compass Calibration” explained
    previously.

    2-32

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 99

    Outside Power Mirror
    The outside power mirror
    control is located on the
    driver’s door.

    If you reach the mirror’s end of the travel position in any
    direction, the mirror will enter a ratcheting mode.
    This action is harmless. It is a warning that the mirror
    can go no further. To stop this action, back the mirror up
    by moving the control in the opposite direction.
    Fold the mirror in manually before entering a car wash.
    To do this, pull the mirror in toward the vehicle. Push the
    mirror back out when finished.

    Outside Curb View Assist Mirror

    1. Turn the knob toward the mirror you desire to adjust.
    2. Move the control in the direction you want the
    mirror to go.
    3. Adjust the mirror in all four directions so that you can
    see the side of your vehicle and the area behind your
    vehicle.

    The passenger’s outside mirror will adjust to a preset tilt
    position while the vehicle is in REVERSE (R) gear. Curb
    view assist may be useful when you are parallel parking.
    The mirror will return to normal position when the vehicle
    is shifted out of REVERSE (R) gear. Automatic mirror
    movement in either direction will follow a short delay.
    You can turn this feature on or off through the
    Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Vehicle
    Customization on page 3-50.

    4. After adjusting each mirror, turn the control to the
    center position so the mirror cannot be moved.

    2-33

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 100

    Outside Convex Mirror

    {CAUTION:
    A convex mirror can make things (like other
    vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
    If you cut too sharply into the right or left lane,
    you could hit a vehicle. Check your inside
    mirror or glance over your shoulder before
    changing lanes.

    OnStar® System
    OnStar® uses global positioning system (GPS) satellite
    technology, wireless communications, and call centers
    to provide you with a wide range of safety, security,
    information, and convenience services.
    A complete OnStar® user’s guide and the terms and
    conditions of the OnStar® Subscription Service
    Agreement are included in the vehicle’s glove box
    literature. For more information, visit www.onstar.com
    or www.onstarcanada.com. Contact OnStar® at
    1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827), or press the
    OnStar® button to speak to an OnStar® advisor 24 hours
    a day, 7 days a week.

    The passenger’s outside mirror is convex. A convex
    mirror’s surface is curved so more can be seen from
    the driver’s seat.

    Terms and conditions of the Subscription Service
    Agreement can be found at www.onstar.com or
    www.onstarcanada.com.

    Outside Heated Mirrors

    OnStar® Services

    When you operate the rear window defogger, a defogger
    also warms the heated driver’s and passenger’s outside
    rearview mirrors to help clear them of ice, snow and
    condensation.

    For new vehicles equipped with OnStar®, the Safe and
    Sound Plan is included for the first year. You can extend
    this plan beyond the first year, or upgrade to the
    Directions and Connections Plan to meet your needs.
    For more information, press the OnStar® button to speak
    with an advisor.

    2-34

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 101

    Safe and Sound Plan
    • Advanced Automatic Collision Notification
    • Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment
    • Emergency Services
    • Roadside Assistance
    • Stolen Vehicle Tracking
    • Accident Assist
    • Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert
    • Remote Diagnostics
    • Online Concierge

    Directions and Connections Plan





    All Safe and Sound Plan Services
    Driving Directions

    OnStar® Personal Calling
    As an OnStar® subscriber, the Personal Calling
    capability is an available hands-free wireless phone that
    is integrated into the vehicle. Calls can be placed
    nationwide using simple voice commands with no
    additional contracts and no additional roaming charges.
    To find out more about OnStar® Personal Calling,
    refer to the OnStar® user’s guide in the vehicle’s glove
    box, visit www.onstar.com or www.onstarcanada.com;
    or speak to an OnStar® advisor by pressing the OnStar®
    button or calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).

    OnStar® Virtual Advisor
    Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar® Personal Calling
    that uses minutes to access up-to-date weather and
    traffic reports for your area, news and sports updates,
    stock quotes, entertainment, and more. Customize your
    information profile at www.myonstar.com. See the
    OnStar® user’s guide for more information.

    Ride Assist
    Information and Convenience Services

    2-35

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 102

    OnStar® Steering Wheel Controls
    A steering wheel control
    can be used to interact
    with the OnStar® personal
    calling feature.

    HomeLink® Wireless Control
    System

    To make a phone call, press the Talk/Mute button with
    this symbol on the steering wheel, say “dial”, then
    say the number you wish to dial with no pauses.
    When calling into voice mail systems, or to dial directory
    numbers, press the Talk/Mute button, say the number
    one at a time, wait for the response to each digit, then
    say “dial.”
    See the OnStar® user’s guide for more information.

    HomeLink®, a combined universal transmitter and
    receiver, provides a way to replace up to three hand-held
    transmitters used to activate devices such as gate
    operators, garage door openers, entry door locks,
    security systems and home lighting. Additional
    HomeLink® information can be found on the internet at
    www.homelink.com or by calling 1-800-355-3515.

    2-36

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 103

    If your vehicle is equipped with the HomeLink®
    Transmitter, it complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
    Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
    (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
    (2) this device must accept any interference received,
    including interference that may cause undesired
    operation.
    This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
    Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
    (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this
    device must accept any interference received,
    including interference that may cause undesired
    operation of the device.

    If you have a newer garage door opener with rolling
    codes, please be sure to follow Steps 6 through 8
    to complete the programming of your HomeLink®
    Transmitter.
    Read the instructions completely before attempting to
    program the HomeLink® Transmitter. Because of
    the steps involved, it may be helpful to have another
    person available to assist you in programming the
    transmitter.

    Changes and modifications to this system by other than
    an authorized service facility could void authorization
    to use this equipment.

    Keep the original transmitter for use in other vehicles as
    well as for future HomeLink® programming. It is also
    recommended that upon the sale of the vehicle, the
    programmed HomeLink® buttons should be erased for
    security purposes. Refer to “Erasing HomeLink® Buttons”
    or, for assistance, contact HomeLink® on the Internet at:
    www.homelink.com or by calling 1-800-355-3515.

    HomeLink® Wireless Control
    System Operation

    Be sure that people and objects are clear of the garage
    door or gate operator you are programming. When
    programming a garage door, it is advised to park outside
    of the garage.

    Do not use the HomeLink® Transmitter with any garage
    door opener that does not have the “stop and reverse”
    feature. This includes any garage door opener model
    manufactured before April 1, 1982.

    It is recommended that a new battery be installed in
    your hand-held transmitter for quicker and more
    accurate transmission of the radio frequency.

    2-37

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 104

    Programming HomeLink®
    Your vehicle’s engine should be turned off while
    programming the transmitter. Follow these steps to
    program up to three channels:
    1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons,
    releasing only when the indicator light begins to
    flash, after 20 seconds. Do not hold down the
    buttons for longer than 30 seconds and do not
    repeat this step to program a second and/or third
    transmitter to the remaining two HomeLink® buttons.
    2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter about
    1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink®
    buttons while keeping the indicator light in view.
    3. Simultaneously press and hold both the desired
    button on HomeLink® and the hand-held transmitter
    button. Do not release the buttons until Step 4
    has been completed.
    Some entry gates and garage door openers may
    require you to substitute Step 3 with the procedure
    noted in “Gate Operator and Canadian
    Programming” later in this section.
    4. The indicator light will flash slowly at first and then
    rapidly after HomeLink® successfully receives the
    frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter.
    Release both buttons.

    5. Press and hold the newly-trained HomeLink® button
    and observe the indicator light.
    If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming
    is complete and your device should activate when the
    HomeLink® button is pressed and released.
    To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,
    begin with Step 2 under “Programming HomeLink®.”
    Do not repeat Step 1 as this will erase all of the
    programmed channels.
    If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds
    and then turns to a constant light, continue with
    Steps 6 through 8 following to complete the
    programming of a rolling-code equipped device
    (most commonly, a garage door opener).
    6. Locate in the garage, the garage door opener
    receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”
    or “Smart” button. This can usually be found
    where the hanging antenna wire is attached
    to the motor-head unit.
    7. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or “Smart”
    button. The name and color of the button may
    vary by manufacturer.
    You will have 30 seconds to start Step 8.

    2-38

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 105

    8. Return to the vehicle. Firmly press and hold the
    programmed HomeLink® button for two seconds,
    then release. Repeat the press/hold/release
    sequence a second time, and depending on the
    brand of the garage door opener (or other rolling
    code device), repeat this sequence a third time
    to complete the programming.
    HomeLink® should now activate your rolling-code
    equipped device.
    To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons, begin
    with Step 2 of “Programming HomeLink®.” You do not
    want to repeat Step 1, as this will erase all previous
    programming.

    Gate Operator and Canadian
    Programming

    If you live in Canada, or you are having difficulty
    programming a gate operator by using the “Programming
    HomeLink® ” procedures (regardless of where you live),
    replace Step 3 under “Programming HomeLink® ” with
    the following:
    Continue to press and hold the HomeLink® button while
    you press and release every two seconds (cycle) your
    hand-held transmitter until the frequency signal has been
    successfully accepted by HomeLink®. The indicator light
    will flash slowly at first and then rapidly. Proceed with
    Step 4 under “Programming HomeLink® ” to complete.

    Using HomeLink®
    Press and hold the appropriate HomeLink® button for at
    least half of a second. The indicator light will come
    on while the signal is being transmitted.

    Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter
    signals to “time out” or quit after several seconds of
    transmission. This may not be long enough for
    HomeLink® to pick up the signal during programming.
    Similarly, some U.S. gate operators are manufactured
    to “time out” in the same manner.

    2-39

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 106

    Erasing HomeLink® Buttons
    To erase programming from the three buttons do the
    following:
    1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons until
    the indicator light begins to flash, after 20 seconds.
    Do not hold the two outside buttons for longer
    than 30 seconds.
    2. Release both buttons.
    HomeLink® is now in the train (learning) mode and can
    be programmed at any time beginning with Step 2
    under “Programming HomeLink® ” shown earlier in this
    section.
    Individual buttons cannot be erased, but they can be
    reprogrammed. See “Reprogramming a Single
    HomeLink® Button” following this section.

    Reprogramming a Single HomeLink®
    Button
    To program a device to HomeLink® using a HomeLink®
    button previously trained, follow these steps:
    1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button.
    Do not release the button.
    2. The indicator light will begin to flash after
    20 seconds. While still holding the HomeLink®
    button, proceed with Step 2 under “Programming
    HomeLink® ” shown earlier in this section.

    Resetting Defaults
    To reset HomeLink® to default settings do the following:
    1. Hold down the two outside buttons for about
    20 seconds until the indicator light begins to flash.
    2. Continue to hold both buttons until the HomeLink®
    indicator light turns off.
    3. Release both buttons.
    For questions or comments, contact HomeLink® at
    1-800-355-3515, or on the Internet at
    www.homelink.com.

    2-40

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 107

    Storage Areas

    Overhead Console

    Glove Box
    Open the glove box by pulling up on the handle.

    Cupholder(s)
    Your vehicle is equipped
    with a cupholder on the
    instrument panel next
    to the radio. To open the
    cupholder, push once
    on the arm and the
    cupholder will move
    into position for use.
    To close the cupholder,
    lift the arm up towards the
    instrument panel.
    A molded cupholder is located on the front of the center
    console and two more are located at the rear of the
    center console. To use the rear cupholders, pull down
    on the lid.

    Your vehicle may have this feature. The overhead
    console may include reading lamps, a HomeLink®
    transmitter, and a sunroof switch. See the following for
    more information:
    • Reading Lamps on page 3-18
    • HomeLink® Wireless Control System on page 2-36
    • Sunroof on page 2-45

    Center Console Storage Area
    If your vehicle has this console compartment, squeeze
    the front lever while lifting the top to open it.
    The console may contain one or more of the following
    components:
    • Rear Seat Audio Controls. See Rear Seat Audio
    (RSA) on page 3-92 for more information.
    • Rear Climate Control. See Rear Climate Control
    System on page 3-24 for more information.
    • Accessory Power Outlets. See Accessory Power
    Outlets on page 3-19 for more information.
    • Ignition Switch. See Ignition Positions on page 2-20.
    If your vehicle has the center armrest compartment, lift
    the cover by pulling up on the latch handle located
    underneath the front edge of the armrest. The storage
    area includes slots for cassettes or compact discs.
    2-41

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 108

    Luggage Carrier

    {CAUTION:
    If you try to carry something on top of your
    vehicle that is longer or wider than the luggage
    carrier — like paneling, plywood, a mattress
    and so forth — the wind can catch it as you
    drive along. This can cause you to lose
    control. What you are carrying could be
    violently torn off, and this could cause you or
    other drivers to have a collision, and of course
    damage your vehicle. You may be able to carry
    something like this inside. But, never carry
    something longer or wider than the luggage
    carrier on top of your vehicle.

    Your vehicle may be equipped with a luggage carrier
    that allows you to load things on top of your vehicle.
    The luggage carrier, if equipped, has side rails attached
    to the roof, and places to use for tying things down.
    These let you load some other things on top of
    your vehicle, as long as they are not wider or longer
    than the luggage carrier.
    Crossrails can be purchased from your dealer.
    Notice: Loading cargo on the luggage carrier that
    weighs more than 200 lbs (91 kg) or hangs over
    the rear or sides of the vehicle may damage your
    vehicle. Load cargo so that it rests on the slats
    as far forward as possible and against the side rails,
    making sure to fasten it securely.

    2-42

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 109

    Do not exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when
    loading your vehicle. For more information on vehicle
    capacity and loading, see Loading Your Vehicle on
    page 4-29.
    To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you are driving,
    check now and then to make sure the luggage carrier
    is locked and cargo is still securely fastened.
    When the luggage carrier is not in use, place the
    crossrails at the following positions for reduced wind
    noise. Place one crossrail at the rear most point of the
    vehicle and the other crossrail above the opening of
    the rear door.

    Rear Floor Storage Lid

    {CAUTION:
    If any removable convenience item is not
    secured properly, it can move around in a
    collision or sudden stop. People in the vehicle
    could be injured. Be sure to secure any such
    item properly.
    Your vehicle has a rear cargo area with a removable
    storage lid.
    To remove the rear floor storage lid, do the following:
    1. Press the latch release and lift up the latch handle.
    2. Raise the lid slightly to unhook it.
    3. Pull the lid toward you to release it from the forward
    mounting slots.
    To reinstall the rear floor storage lid, reverse the
    previous steps. Make sure the lid is secure by applying
    slight pressure to the latch until you hear it click.

    2-43

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 110

    Cargo Cover
    If your vehicle has a cargo cover, you can use it to
    cover items in the cargo area of your vehicle.
    To install the cargo cover, do the following:
    1. Align the endcap with the pocket in the trim panel
    located behind the rear seat.
    2. Squeeze the opposite endcap, align it with the
    pocket located on the opposite side of the trim
    panel and release.
    3. Grasp the handle and unroll the cover. Latch the
    posts into the sockets on the inside of the vehicle
    to secure it.
    To remove the cargo cover, do the following:
    1. Release the cover from the latch posts and carefully
    roll it back up.
    2. Squeeze one endcap and remove it from the
    pocket in the trim panel.
    3. Remove the cargo cover from the other endcap so
    that you can remove the shade from the vehicle.

    {CAUTION:
    An improperly stored cargo cover could be
    thrown about the vehicle during a collision or
    sudden maneuver. You or others could be
    injured. If you remove the cover, always store
    it in the proper storage location. When you put
    it back, always be sure that it is securely
    reattached.

    Cargo Tie Downs
    There may be cargo tie
    downs in the rear of your
    vehicle that allow you
    to strap cargo in and keep
    it from moving.

    2-44

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 111

    Sunroof

    Vehicle Personalization

    The vehicle may be equipped with a power sliding
    sunroof. The ignition must be on, or turned to ACC,
    or Retained Accessory Power (RAP) must be active
    to operate it. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
    on page 2-20.

    Memory Seat

    The sunroof switch is
    located in the overhead
    console.

    Press and release the back of the button to open the
    sunroof. Press and hold the front of the button to close
    the sunroof.

    The controls for the
    memory function
    are located on the
    driver’s door.

    These buttons are used to program and recall memory
    settings for the driver’s seating position, both outside
    mirror positions, and the adjustable pedals, if equipped.
    The settings for these features can be saved for up
    to two drivers.

    With the sunroof closed, press the front of the button to
    open the sunroof to the vent position.
    The sunroof has a sunshade which can be pulled
    forward to block sun rays. If the sunshade is in the
    closed position, it will open when the sunroof is opened.
    2-45

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 112

    To store the memory settings, do the following:
    1. Adjust the driver’s seat, including the seatback
    recliner and lumbar, both of the outside mirrors,
    and the adjustable pedals, if equipped, to the
    desired position.
    2. Press and hold the 1 or 2 button of the memory
    control for three seconds. A double chime will sound
    to let you know that the position has been stored.
    To repeat the procedure for a second driver, follow the
    preceding steps, pressing the other numbered memory
    control button.
    To recall the memory settings, press and release
    button 1 or 2 while the vehicle is in PARK (P).
    A single chime will sound and the memory position
    will be recalled.
    To stop recall movement of the memory seat feature at
    any time, press one of the memory buttons or power
    seat controls.

    Easy Exit Seat
    The control for the easy exit seat function is located on
    the driver’s door below the memory buttons 1 and 2.
    The easy exit seat button is used to program and recall
    the desired driver’s seat position when exiting or entering
    the vehicle. The mirrors, power lumbar, recline, and
    adjustable pedals, if equipped, positions will not be stored
    or recalled when using the easy exit seat function.
    The seat position can be saved for up to two drivers.

    To store the easy exit seat position, do the following:
    Press and release the 1 or 2 button of the memory control
    for less than three seconds. The seat will move to the
    stored memory position.
    1. Adjust the seat to the desired exit position.
    2. Press and hold the easy exit seat button for more
    than three seconds. A double chime will sound to let
    you know that the position has been stored for the
    selected button 1 or 2.
    To repeat the procedure for a second driver, follow the
    preceding steps, pressing the other numbered memory
    control button.
    To recall the easy exit seat position, do one of the
    following:

    • Press the easy exit seat button on the memory
    control while the vehicle is in PARK (P). The seat will
    move to the stored exit position.

    • Or, if the easy exit seat feature is activated in the
    Driver Information Center (DIC), removing the key
    from the ignition will move the seat to the exit
    position. See “Easy Exit Seat” under DIC Vehicle
    Customization on page 3-50 for more information on
    activating this feature in the DIC.

    2-46

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 113

    Section 3

    Instrument Panel

    Instrument Panel Overview ...............................3-4
    Hazard Warning Flashers ................................3-6
    Other Warning Devices ...................................3-6
    Horn .............................................................3-6
    Tilt Wheel .....................................................3-6
    Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .........................3-7
    Turn and Lane-Change Signals ........................3-7
    Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer ..................3-8
    Flash-to-Pass .................................................3-8
    Windshield Wipers ..........................................3-9
    Windshield Washer .......................................3-10
    Headlamp Washer ........................................3-11
    Cruise Control ..............................................3-11
    Headlamps ..................................................3-14
    Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) .......................3-15
    Automatic Headlamp System ..........................3-16
    Fog Lamps ..................................................3-17
    Instrument Panel Brightness ...........................3-17
    Dome Lamps ...............................................3-17
    Dome Lamp Override ....................................3-18
    Entry Lighting ...............................................3-18
    Exit Lighting .................................................3-18
    Reading Lamps ............................................3-18
    Battery Run-Down Protection ..........................3-19
    Accessory Power Outlets ...............................3-19

    Climate Controls ............................................3-20
    Dual Automatic Climate Control System ...........3-20
    Outlet Adjustment .........................................3-24
    Rear Climate Control System .........................3-24
    Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............3-25
    Instrument Panel Cluster ................................3-26
    Speedometer and Odometer ...........................3-27
    Trip Odometer ..............................................3-27
    Tachometer .................................................3-27
    Safety Belt Reminder Light .............................3-28
    Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light .............3-28
    Airbag Readiness Light ..................................3-29
    Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ...................3-30
    Charging System Light ..................................3-32
    Voltmeter Gage ............................................3-32
    Brake System Warning Light ..........................3-33
    Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light .............3-34
    Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ..................3-35
    Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............................3-35
    Oil Pressure Gage ........................................3-38
    Change Engine Oil Light ................................3-39
    Security Light ...............................................3-40
    Cruise Control Light ......................................3-40
    Reduced Engine Power Light .........................3-40
    Highbeam On Light .......................................3-41
    Service All-Wheel Drive Light .........................3-41
    3-1

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 114

    Section 3

    Instrument Panel

    Check Gages Warning Light ...........................3-41
    Gate Ajar Light .............................................3-42
    Fuel Gage ...................................................3-42
    Low Fuel Warning Light .................................3-43
    Check Gas Cap Light ....................................3-43
    Driver Information Center (DIC) .......................3-43
    DIC Operation and Displays ...........................3-44
    DIC Warnings and Messages .........................3-46
    DIC Vehicle Customization .............................3-50
    Audio System(s) .............................................3-56
    Setting the Time ...........................................3-56
    Radio with CD ..............................................3-57

    Radio with Six-Disc CD .................................3-69
    Navigation/Radio System ...............................3-81
    Rear Seat Entertainment System ....................3-81
    Rear Seat Audio (RSA) .................................3-92
    Theft-Deterrent Feature ..................................3-93
    Audio Steering Wheel Controls .......................3-94
    Radio Reception ...........................................3-95
    Care of Your CDs and DVDs .........................3-95
    Care of the CD and DVD Player .....................3-95
    Fixed Mast Antenna ......................................3-96
    XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System .............3-96

    3-2

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 115

    ✍ NOTES

    3-3

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 116

    Instrument Panel Overview

    3-4

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 117

    The main components of your instrument panel are the following:
    A. Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment on page 3-24.
    B. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See Turn
    Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-7.
    C. Audio Steering Wheel Controls. See Audio Steering
    Wheel Controls on page 3-94.
    D. Horn. See Horn on page 3-6.
    E. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument Panel
    Cluster on page 3-26.
    F. Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever. See Windshield
    Wipers on page 3-9.
    G. Hazard Warning Flashers Button and Driver
    Information Center Buttons. See Hazard Warning
    Flashers on page 3-6 or Driver Information Center
    (DIC) on page 3-43.
    H. Rear Window Washer/Wiper. See Windshield
    Washer on page 3-10.
    I. Instrument Panel Brightness Control. See Instrument
    Panel Brightness on page 3-17.

    J. Hood Release. See Hood Release on page 5-9.
    K. Dome Lamp Override Button. See Dome Lamp
    Override on page 3-18.
    L. Audio System. See Audio System(s) on page 3-56.
    M. Climate Controls. See Dual Automatic Climate
    Control System on page 3-20.
    N. Gear Shift Lever. See Automatic Transmission
    Operation on page 2-24.
    O. Ignition Switch. See Ignition Positions on page 2-20.
    P. Parking Brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-27.
    Q. Accessory Power Outlet. See Accessory Power
    Outlets on page 3-19.
    R. Cupholder. See Cupholder(s) on page 2-41.
    S. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 2-41.

    3-5

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 118

    Hazard Warning Flashers

    Horn

    Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They
    also let police know you have a problem. Your front
    and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.

    To sound the horn, press the horn symbols on the
    steering wheel pad.

    The hazard warning
    flasher button is located in
    the center of the
    instrument panel.

    Tilt Wheel
    You should adjust the
    steering wheel before you
    drive. The tilt lever is
    located to the left of the
    steering column, under the
    turn signal lever.

    Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what
    position your key is in, and even if the key is not in.
    Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal
    lamps flash on and off. Press the button again to
    turn the flashers off.
    When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn
    signals will not work.

    Other Warning Devices
    If you carry reflective triangles, you can set them up at
    the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind
    your vehicle.

    You can raise it to the highest level to give your legs
    more room when you enter and exit the vehicle.
    To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull the
    lever toward you. Move the steering wheel to a
    comfortable level, then release the lever to lock the
    wheel in place.

    3-6

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 119

    Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever

    Turn and Lane-Change Signals
    The turn signal has two upward (for right) and
    two downward (for left) positions. These positions allow
    you to signal a turn or a lane change.
    To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down.
    When the turn is finished, the lever will return
    automatically.

    The lever on the left side of the steering column
    includes the following:

    • G Turn and Lane-Change Signals. See Turn and

    An arrow on the instrument
    panel cluster will flash in
    the direction of the
    turn or lane change.

    Lane-Change Signals on page 3-7.

    • O Headlamps. See Headlamps on page 3-14.
    • 3 Headlamp High/Low Beam-Changer. See
    Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-8.

    • Flash-To-Pass Feature. See Flash-to-Pass
    on page 3-8.

    • - Fog Lamps. See Fog Lamps on page 3-17.
    • I Cruise Control. See Cruise Control on
    page 3-11.

    To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the lever
    until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you
    complete your lane change. The lever will return by itself
    when you release it. The bottom of the outside
    rearview mirrors may also be equipped with lane change
    indicators.
    As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrows
    flash more quickly than normal, a signal bulb may
    be burned out and other drivers won’t see your
    turn signal.

    3-7

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 120

    When the high beams are
    on, this indicator light on
    the instrument panel
    cluster will also be on.

    If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an
    accident. If the arrows don’t go on at all when you signal
    a turn, check the fuse. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers
    on page 5-95 and check for burned-out bulbs.
    If you have a trailer towing option with added wiring for
    the trailer lamps, a different turn signal flasher is
    used. With this flasher installed, the signal indicator will
    flash even if a turn signal bulb is burned out. Check
    the front and rear turn signal lamps regularly to make
    sure they are working.

    Turn Signal On Chime
    If your turn signal is left on for more than 3/4 of a mile
    (1.2 km), a chime will sound at each flash of the
    turn signal. To turn off the chime, move the turn signal
    lever to the off position.

    Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
    To change the headlamps from low to high beam,
    push the lever toward the instrument panel. To return to
    low-beam headlamps, pull the multifunction lever
    toward you. Then release it.

    Flash-to-Pass
    This feature lets you use your high-beam headlamps to
    signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass.
    It works even if your headlamps are in the automatic
    position.
    To use it, pull the turn signal lever toward you, then
    release it.
    If your headlamps are in the automatic position or on
    low beam, your high-beam headlamps will turn on.
    They’ll stay on as long as you hold the lever toward you.
    The high-beam indicator on the instrument panel
    cluster will come on. Release the lever to return to
    normal operation.

    3-8

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 121

    Windshield Wipers

    x (Delay Adjustment):

    Use this band to set the
    length of the delay between wipes when using the delay
    feature. The closer you move the band toward mist,
    the longer the delay. The windshield wiper lever must be
    in delay for this feature to work.

    6 (Low Speed): Put the lever in this position for
    slow, steady wiping cycles.
    1 (High Speed):
    The lever on the right side of the steering column
    operates the windshield wipers.

    7 (Mist):

    Pull the lever down and release it for a
    single wiping cycle. The lever will return to its original
    position. For more cycles, hold the lever down before
    releasing it.

    9 (Off): Put the lever in this position to turn off
    the wipers.
    & (Delay):

    Put the lever in this position to set a delay
    between wipes. Turn the delay adjustment band to
    set the length of the delay.

    Put the lever in this position for

    rapid wiping cycles.
    If the windshield wipers are in use for about six seconds
    while you are driving, the exterior lamps will come on
    automatically if the exterior lamp control is in AUTO.
    Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades
    before using them. If they’re frozen to the windshield,
    gently loosen or thaw them. If the blades do become
    damaged, install new blades or blade inserts. For more
    information, see Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
    on page 5-51.
    Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor.
    A circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools down.
    Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload.

    3-9

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 122

    Windshield Washer
    L(Windshield Washer):

    To spray washer fluid on the
    windshield, press the windshield washer paddle. The
    wipers will clear the window and then either stop
    or return to your preset speed.

    Rear Window Washer/Wiper
    This control is located to
    the left of the steering
    wheel on the instrument
    panel.

    {CAUTION:
    In freezing weather, do not use your washer
    until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
    washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
    blocking your vision.

    To turn the rear wiper on, turn the control to either 1, 2,
    or 3. For delayed wiping, turn the control to 1 or 2.
    For steady wiping, turn the control to 3. To turn the wiper
    off, turn the control to 0.
    To wash the rear window, press the washer symbol
    located in the center of the control.
    The rear window washer uses the same fluid bottle as
    the windshield washer. However, the rear window
    washer will run out of fluid before the windshield washer.
    If you can wash your windshield but not your rear
    window, check the fluid level.

    3-10

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 123

    Headlamp Washer

    Cruise Control

    Your vehicle may be equipped with a headlamp washer
    system. The headlamp washers clear debris from the
    headlamp lenses by soaking the lens with fluid, waiting
    for about five seconds, then rinsing the loose debris from
    the lenses.

    9(Off): This position
    turns the system off.

    The headlamp washers are located under the
    headlamps. The headlamp washers activate for one
    wash-wait-rinse cycle when the front windshield washer
    button is pressed for the first time after your vehicle is
    turned on. The headlamps washers then activate
    automatically for one cycle after every four front
    windshield washes.
    The headlamps must be on to be washed. If the
    headlamps are off, only the front windshield will be
    washed. See Windshield Washer on page 3-10 for more
    information.

    R(On):

    This position activates the system.

    + (Resume/Accelerate): Push the lever to this symbol
    to make the vehicle accelerate or resume to a
    previously set speed.

    T(Set):

    Press this button to set the speed.

    With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about
    25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot
    on the accelerator. This can really help on long
    trips. Cruise control does not work at speeds below
    about 25 mph (40 km/h).

    3-11

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 124

    If you apply your brakes, the cruise control will shut off.

    Setting Cruise Control

    {CAUTION:

    {CAUTION:

    Cruise control can be dangerous where you
    cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do
    not use your cruise control on winding roads
    or in heavy traffic.

    If you leave your cruise control on when you
    are not using cruise, you might hit a button
    and go into cruise when you do not want to.
    You could be startled and even lose control.
    Keep the cruise control switch off until you
    want to use cruise control.

    Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery
    roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire
    traction can cause needless wheel spinning,
    and you could lose control. Do not use cruise
    control on slippery roads.

    1. Move the cruise control switch to on.
    2. Get up to the speed you want.
    3. Press in the set button at the end of the lever and
    release it.
    4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
    The cruise light on the
    instrument panel will
    illuminate when the cruise
    control is engaged.

    3-12

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 125

    Resuming a Set Speed
    Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed
    and then you apply the brake. This, of course,
    disengages the cruise control. But you do not need to
    reset it.
    Once you’re going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more, you
    can move the cruise control switch briefly from on to
    resume/accelerate.
    You will go right back up to your chosen speed and stay
    there.
    If you hold the switch at resume/accelerate the vehicle
    will keep going faster until you release the switch or
    apply the brake. So unless you want to go faster, do not
    hold the switch at resume/accelerate.

    • Move the cruise switch from on to
    resume/accelerate. Hold it there until you get up to
    the speed you want, and then release the switch.
    To increase your speed in very small amounts,
    move the switch briefly to resume/accelerate. Each
    time you do this, your vehicle will go about
    1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.

    Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
    Control
    • Press in the button at the end of the lever until you
    reach the lower speed you want, then release it.

    • To slow down in very small amounts, briefly press
    the set button. Each time you do this, you will go
    about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.

    Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
    Control

    Passing Another Vehicle While Using
    Cruise Control

    There are two ways to go to a higher speed:

    Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.
    When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will
    slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.

    • Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher
    speed. Press the set button at the end of the lever,
    then release the button and the accelerator
    pedal. You will now cruise at the higher speed.
    If the accelerator pedal is held longer than
    60 seconds, cruise control will turn off.

    3-13

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 126

    Using Cruise Control on Hills

    Erasing Speed Memory

    How well your cruise control will work on hills depends
    upon your speed, load and the steepness of the
    hills. When going up steep hills, you may want to step
    on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed.
    When going downhill, you may have to brake or shift to
    a lower gear to keep your speed down. Of course,
    applying the brake takes you out of cruise control. Many
    drivers find this to be too much trouble and do not
    use cruise control on steep hills.

    When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition, your
    cruise control set speed memory is erased.

    Ending Cruise Control
    To turn off the cruise control, do one of the following:






    Step lightly on the brake pedal,
    move the cruise control switch to off, or
    shift the transmission to NEUTRAL (N).
    If your vehicle has the StabiliTrak® feature, cruise
    control will turn off if road conditions cause
    StabiliTrak® to activate.

    • If the accelerator pedal is held longer than
    60 seconds, cruise control will turn off.

    Headlamps
    The exterior lamp control is located in the middle of the
    turn signal/multifunction lever. See Turn Signal/
    Multifunction Lever on page 3-7.

    O(Exterior Lamp Control):

    Turn the control with this
    symbol on it to operate the exterior lamps.
    The exterior lamp control has the following four positions:

    O (On/Off): Turn the control to this position to turn off
    the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) and Automatic
    Headlamps. Turning the control to this position again
    turns the automatic lighting system back on. This feature
    is not available for vehicles first sold in Canada.
    AUTO (Automatic): Turn the control to this position to
    put the headlamps in automatic mode. AUTO mode
    will turn the exterior lamps on and off depending upon
    how much light is available outside of the vehicle.

    The cruise control will turn off automatically if the
    traction control system or StabiliTrak® system activate,
    if your vehicle is equipped with either feature.

    3-14

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 127

    ; (Parking Lamps):

    Turn the control to this position
    to turn on the parking lamps together with the
    following:






    Sidemarker Lamps
    Taillamps
    License Plate Lamps
    Instrument Panel Lights

    5 (Headlamps):

    Turn the control to this position to
    turn on the headlamps, together with the previously
    listed lamps and lights.

    Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
    Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
    others to see the front of your vehicle during the
    day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving
    conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the short
    periods after dawn and before sunset. Fully functional
    daytime running lamps are required on all vehicles
    first sold in Canada.

    The DRL will activate when the following conditions
    are met:

    • The ignition is on.
    • The exterior lamps knob is in automatic
    headlamp mode.

    • The light sensor detects daytime light.
    • The transmission is not in PARK (P).
    When DRL are on, either your turn signal lamps or
    headlamps will be on. If your vehicle is equipped with the
    High Intensity Discharge (HID) lighting system option, the
    DRL system will turn on your turn signal lamps. If your
    vehicle is not equipped with HID, the DRL system will turn
    on your headlamps at reduced brightness. The taillamps,
    sidemarker and other lamps won’t be on. The instrument
    panel won’t be lit up either.
    When it begins to get dark, the headlamps will
    automatically switch from DRL to the regular headlamps.

    3-15

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 128

    Automatic Headlamp System
    When it is dark enough outside, your Automatic
    Headlamp System will turn on your headlamps at the
    normal brightness along with other lamps such as
    the taillamps, sidemarker, parking lamps and the
    instrument panel lights. The radio lights will also be on.
    Your vehicle is equipped with a light sensor on the
    top of the instrument panel. Be sure it is not covered or
    the system will be on whenever the ignition is on.
    The system may also turn on your lights when driving
    through a parking garage, heavy overcast weather
    or a tunnel. This is normal.
    There is a delay in the transition between the daytime
    and nighttime operation of the Daytime Running
    Lamps (DRL) and the automatic headlamp systems, so
    that driving under bridges or bright overhead street
    lights does not affect the system. The DRL and
    automatic headlamp system will only be affected when
    the light sensor sees a change in lighting lasting
    longer than the delay.

    If you start your vehicle in a dark garage, the automatic
    headlamp system will come on immediately. Once
    you leave the garage, it will take about one minute for
    the automatic headlamp system to change to DRL if it is
    light outside. During that delay, your instrument panel
    cluster may not be as bright as usual. Make sure
    your instrument panel brightness control is in the full
    bright position.
    To idle your vehicle with the automatic headlamp
    system off, start your vehicle and turn the headlamp
    switch to the off position. The switch will automatically
    return to the AUTO position. The automatic headlamp
    system will stay off until you turn the switch to the
    off position again as explained in “Headlamps”. See
    Headlamps on page 3-14. This feature is not available
    for vehicles first sold in Canada.

    3-16

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 129

    Fog Lamps

    Instrument Panel Brightness

    Use the fog lamps for better vision in foggy or misty
    conditions.

    Turn the knob to adjust the
    instrument panel lights.
    Turn the knob all the way
    up to turn on the interior
    lamps.

    The fog lamp control is located on the turn
    signal/multifunction lever.

    -: The band with this symbol is used to turn the fog
    lamps on and off.
    When the fog lamps are turned on, the parking lamps
    also turn on. A message will also display on the
    DIC when the fog lamps are turned on or off. See Driver
    Information Center (DIC) on page 3-43.

    • To turn the fog lamps on or off, turn the fog lamp
    band on the lever up to the dot and release it.
    The band will return to its original position.

    Dome Lamps
    The dome lamps will come on when you open a door
    unless the dome lamp override is pressed in.

    • If you turn on the high-beam headlamps, the fog
    lamps will turn off. They will turn back on again
    when you switch back to low-beam headlamps.
    When the Fog Lamps are turned on or off, a message
    will appear on the Driver Information Center. See
    DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-46.
    Some localities have laws that require the headlamps to
    be on along with the fog lamps.

    3-17

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 130

    Dome Lamp Override
    The dome override button
    is located to the left of the
    steering column.

    Entry Lighting
    Your vehicle is equipped with entry lighting.
    When any door is opened, the dome lamps will come
    on as long as the dome override lamp override button is
    not pressed in. When all the doors are closed, the
    lamps will stay on for a short period of time and will then
    turn off automatically. If you use your remote keyless
    entry transmitter to unlock the vehicle, the interior lights
    will come on for a short time whether or not the dome
    lamp override is on.

    Exit Lighting
    To turn the dome lamps off, press the button. The dome
    lamps will remain off when a door is open. This will
    override the illuminated entry feature unless you use your
    remote keyless entry transmitter to unlock the vehicle.

    With exit lighting, the interior lamps will come on when
    you remove the key from the ignition. If the dome
    override is on, these lights will stay on for a short period
    of time and then will go out.

    To return the lamps to automatic operation, press the
    button again. The dome lamps will come on when
    you open any door.

    Reading Lamps
    Press the indented part of the lenses on the reading
    lamps located in the overhead console to turn them on
    or off.

    3-18

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 131

    Battery Run-Down Protection

    To use the outlet, remove the cover. Replace the cover
    when not in use.

    This feature shuts off the dome, courtesy and vanity
    lamps if they are left on for more than 10 minutes when
    the ignition is off. This will keep your battery from
    running down.

    Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible
    with the accessory power outlet and could result
    in blown vehicle or adaptor fuses. If you experience a
    problem, see your dealer for additional information
    on the accessory power outlets.

    If the battery run-down protection shuts off the interior
    lamps, it may be necessary to do one of the following to
    return to normal operation:

    • Shut off all lamps and close all doors.
    • Turn the ignition key to RUN.
    This feature will also turn off the parking lamps and
    headlamps under most conditions, if they are left on.
    To turn them back on, turn the exterior lamps knob.
    After turning them back on, the lights will not turn
    off again unless the vehicle has been started.

    Accessory Power Outlets
    With the accessory power outlets, you can plug in
    auxiliary electrical equipment such as a cellular
    telephone or CB radio.

    Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to your
    vehicle may damage it or keep other components
    from working as they should. The repairs would not
    be covered by your warranty. Do not use equipment
    exceeding maximum amperage rating. Check
    with your dealer before adding electrical equipment.
    When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow
    the proper installation instructions included with
    the equipment.
    Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
    damage not covered by your warranty. Do not
    hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket
    from the plug because the power outlets are
    designed for accessory power plugs only.

    The outlet can accept electrical equipment rated at a
    maximum of 20 Amps.
    There are two outlets to the right of the cupholder on
    the floor console.
    3-19

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 132

    Climate Controls
    Dual Automatic Climate Control
    System

    9(Off): Press this button to turn off the entire climate
    control system. Outside air will still enter the vehicle,
    and will be directed to the floor. Press the AUTO button,
    the mode button, the fan arrows, or either temperature
    knob to turn the system on.
    C (Mode): Press this button to manually select the air
    delivery mode to the floor, instrument panel, or
    windshield outlets. The system will stay in the selected
    mode until the mode button is pressed again or the
    AUTO button is pressed.

    With this system you can control the heating, cooling
    and ventilation for your vehicle. When your vehicle
    is first started and the climate control system is on, or if
    the climate control system has been turned on, the
    display will show the driver’s temperature setting for
    five seconds. Then it will show the outside temperature.

    Driver’s Side Temperature Knob: Turn this knob
    clockwise or counterclockwise to raise or lower
    the temperature on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
    The display will show the temperature setting decreasing
    or increasing and an arrow pointing toward the driver.
    This knob can also adjust the passenger’s side
    temperature setting if the two are linked.

    3-20

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 133

    Passenger’s Side Temperature Knob: Turn this knob
    clockwise or counterclockwise to manually raise or lower
    the temperature on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.
    The display will show the temperature setting decreasing
    or increasing and an arrow pointing toward the
    passenger. The passenger’s temperature setting can be
    set to match and link to the driver’s temperature setting
    by pressing and holding the AUTO button for three
    seconds. When adjusting the driver’s side temperature
    setting, the passenger’s side temperature setting will
    follow and both arrows will appear on the display. The
    passenger’s side temperature setting also resets and
    relinks to the driver’s side temperature setting if the
    vehicle has been off for more than three hours.

    Outside Air Temperature Display
    A new outside temperature reading will be displayed if
    the vehicle has been off for more than three hours. If the
    vehicle has been off for less than three hours, the old
    temperature reading may be displayed because
    underhood heat is affecting the true outside temperature.
    Underhood heat can also affect the outside temperature
    while the engine is running. It may also take several
    minutes of driving before the display updates to
    the actual outside temperature.

    Automatic Operation
    AUTO (Automatic): When automatic operation is
    active, the system will control the inside temperature,
    the air delivery mode, and the fan speed.
    Use the steps below to place the entire system in
    automatic mode:
    1. Press the AUTO button.
    When AUTO is selected, the air conditioning
    operation and air outlet mode will be automatically
    controlled. The air conditioning compressor will
    run continuously when the outside temperature is
    over approximately 40°F (4°C). The air inlet
    will normally be set to outside air. If it’s hot outside,
    the air inlet will automatically switch to recirculate
    inside air to help quickly cool down your vehicle.
    2. Set the driver’s and passenger’s temperature.
    To find your comfort setting, start with a 72°F (22°C)
    temperature setting and allow about 20 minutes
    for the system to adjust. Turn the driver’s or
    passenger’s side temperature knob to adjust the
    temperature setting as necessary. If you choose the
    temperature setting of 60°F (15°C), the system
    will remain at the maximum cooling setting. If you
    choose the temperature setting of 90°F (32°C),
    the system will remain at the maximum heat setting.
    Choosing either maximum setting may not cause
    the vehicle to heat or cool any faster.
    3-21

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 134

    Manual Operation
    To change the current setting, select one of the
    following:

    w9x (Fan): This button allows you to manually
    adjust the fan speed. Press the up arrow to increase fan
    speed and the down arrow to decrease fan speed. The
    display will change to show you the selected fan speed
    and the driver’s side temperature setting for five seconds.
    C (Mode):

    Press this button to manually change the
    direction of the airflow in your vehicle. Keep pressing the
    button until the desired mode appears on the display.
    The display will change to show you the selected
    air delivery mode and the driver’s temperature setting
    for five seconds.

    6(Floor):

    This mode directs most of the air to the
    floor outlets. Some air also comes out of the defroster
    and side window outlets. The recirculation button cannot
    be selected in floor mode.

    @ (Recirculation):

    Press this button to turn
    recirculation mode on or off. When this button is pressed,
    an indicator light in the button will also come on to let you
    know that it is activated. Recirculation mode is used to
    recirculate the air inside of your vehicle. Use this mode to
    help prevent outside odors and/or dust from entering your
    vehicle or to help cool the air inside of your vehicle more
    quickly. Recirculation mode can be used with vent and
    bi-level modes, but it cannot be used with floor, defog or
    defrost modes. Defog and defrost modes are described
    later in this section.

    H(Vent):

    If recirculation mode is selected with floor, defog, or
    defrost modes, the indicator will flash three times and
    then turn off indicating the selection is not available.

    )(Bi-Level):

    You may also notice that the air conditioning compressor
    will run while in recirculation mode. This is normal and will
    help to prevent fogging.

    This mode directs air to the instrument
    panel outlets.

    This mode directs approximately half of
    the air to the instrument panel outlets, then directs
    the remaining air to the floor outlets. A little air is
    directed toward the windshield and the side window
    outlets. Cooler air is directed to the upper outlets and
    warmer air to the floor outlets.

    If the weather is cold and damp, the system may cause
    the windows to fog while using recirculation mode. If the
    windows do start to fog, select defog or defrost mode.
    Recirculation mode, if selected, will be cleared when the
    engine is turned off.

    3-22

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 135

    #A/C (Air Conditioning):

    Press this button to
    manually turn the air conditioning system on or off.
    When the system is on, the system will automatically
    begin to cool and dehumidify the air inside of your
    vehicle. The air conditioning symbol will appear on the
    display when the air conditioning is on and will turn
    off when the air conditioning is off.
    If you turn the air conditioning off while in front defrost
    or defog mode, the air conditioning symbol will turn
    off, however, the A/C compressor will remain on to help
    de-humidify the air inside the vehicle. If one of the
    other modes is selected the compressor will then turn
    the A/C off until it is selected again or the AUTO button
    is pressed.
    You may notice a slight change in engine performance
    when the air-conditioning compressor shuts off and
    turns on again. This is normal.

    Defogging and Defrosting
    Fog on the inside of the windows is a result of moisture
    condensing on the cool window glass. This can be
    reduced if the climate control system is used properly.
    You can use either defog or front defrost to clear
    fog or frost from your windshield.

    -(Defog): Use this setting to clear the windows of fog
    or moisture. This setting will deliver air to the floor
    and windshield outlets.

    0 (Front Defrost):

    Press the front defrost button to
    clear the windshield and side windows of frost or
    fog quickly. The system will automatically control the fan
    speed if you select defrost from AUTO mode. If the
    outside temperature is 40°F (4°C) or warmer, your air
    conditioning compressor will automatically run to
    help dehumidify the air and dry the windshield. Do not
    drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.

    Rear Window Defogger
    The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
    remove fog from the rear window.

    < (Rear):

    Press this button to turn the rear window
    defogger on or off.
    An indicator light in the button will come on to let you
    know that the rear window defogger is activated.
    The rear window defogger will turn off approximately
    10 minutes after the button is pressed. If you need
    additional warming time, press the button again.
    If equipped, your heated mirrors will also come on when
    you press this button.
    Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object to clear
    the inside rear window may damage the rear
    window defogger. Repairs would not be covered by
    your warranty. Do not clear the inside of the rear
    window with sharp objects.
    3-23

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 136

    Outlet Adjustment

    Rear Climate Control System

    Use the air outlets located in the center and on the
    sides of your instrument panel to direct the airflow.

    The lower buttons on the rear seat audio are used to
    adjust the rear seat climate controls. The temperature of
    the air coming through the rear outlets is determined
    by the front passenger’s temperature setting.

    Operation Tips
    • Keep the hood and front air inlets free of ice, snow,
    or any other obstruction, such as leaves. The
    heater and defroster will work far better, reducing
    the chance of fogging the inside of your windows.

    • When you enter a vehicle in cold weather, select
    maximum blower speed for a few moments
    before driving. This helps clear the intake ducts of
    snow and moisture, and reduces the chance of
    fogging the inside of your window.

    • Keep the air path under the front seats clear of
    objects. This helps air to circulate throughout
    your vehicle.

    • Adding outside equipment to the front of your
    vehicle, such as hood-air deflectors, may affect the
    performance of the heating and air conditioning
    system. Check with your dealer before adding
    equipment to the outside of your vehicle.

    z9y (Fan) Press this button to adjust the fan
    speed.

    z\y (Mode) Press this button to change the
    direction of airflow in the rear seat area to either vent,
    bi-level or floor mode.

    P (On/Off) Press this button to turn the rear climate
    controls on or off.
    The rear control will only turn on if the front is on and
    not in defrost mode.
    3-24

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 137

    Warning Lights, Gages, and
    Indicators
    This part describes the warning lights and gages that
    may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you
    locate them.
    Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
    wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause
    an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
    your warning lights and gages could also save you
    or others from injury.
    Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
    problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you will
    see in the details on the next few pages, some
    warning lights come on briefly when you start the
    engine just to let you know they are working. If you are
    familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed
    when this happens.

    Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
    with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages
    and warning lights work together to let you know when
    there is a problem with your vehicle.
    When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
    when you are driving, or when one of the gages
    shows there may be a problem, check the section that
    tells you what to do about it. Please follow this
    manual’s advice.
    Waiting to do repairs can be costly—and even
    dangerous. So please get to know your warning lights
    and gages. They are a big help.
    Your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC) that
    works along with the warning lights and gages. See
    Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-43.

    3-25

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 138

    Instrument Panel Cluster
    Your instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You will know how fast
    you are going, about how much fuel you have used, and many other things you will need to know to drive safely and
    economically.

    United States version shown, Canada similar

    3-26

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 139

    Speedometer and Odometer
    Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both
    miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
    Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has
    been driven, in either miles (used in the United States)
    or kilometers (used in Canada).
    The odometer mileage can be checked without the
    vehicle running. Simply press the trip stem located on
    the instrument panel cluster.
    You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a
    new odometer installed. The new one will be set to
    the correct mileage total of the old odometer.

    The odometer mileage can be checked without the
    vehicle running. Simply press the trip stem on the
    instrument panel cluster.
    If your vehicle ever needs a new odometer installed, the
    new one will be set to the correct mileage total of the
    old odometer.

    Tachometer
    The tachometer displays
    the engine speed in
    revolutions per
    minute (rpm).

    Trip Odometer
    The trip odometer can tell you how far your vehicle has
    been driven since you last set the trip odometer to zero.
    Your vehicle’s odometer works together with the Driver
    Information Center (DIC). You can set a Trip A and
    Trip B odometer. See “Trip Information” under DIC
    Operation and Displays on page 3-44.

    3-27

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 140

    Safety Belt Reminder Light
    When the key is turned to RUN or START, a chime will
    sound for several seconds to remind you and your
    passengers to buckle your safety belts. The driver safety
    belt light will also come on and stay on for several
    seconds, then it will flash for several more. You should
    buckle your seat belt.
    This chime and light will be
    repeated if the driver
    remains unbuckled and the
    vehicle is in motion.

    Passenger Safety Belt Reminder
    Light
    Several seconds after the key is turned to RUN or
    START, a chime will sound for several seconds
    to remind the front passenger to buckle their safety belt.
    This would only occur if the passenger airbag is
    enabled. See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-54
    for more information. The passenger safety belt light
    will also come on and stay on for several seconds, then
    it will flash for several more.
    This chime and light will be
    repeated if the passenger
    remains unbuckled and
    the vehicle is in motion.

    If the driver’s belt is buckled, neither the chime nor the
    light will come on.
    If the passenger’s safety belt is buckled, neither the
    chime nor the light will come on.

    3-28

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 141

    Airbag Readiness Light
    There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument
    panel, which shows the airbag symbol. The system
    checks the airbag’s electrical system for malfunctions.
    The light tells you if there is an electrical problem.
    The system check includes the airbag sensors, the
    airbag modules, the wiring and the crash sensing and
    diagnostic module. For more information on the
    airbag system, see Airbag System on page 1-45.
    This light will come on
    when you start your
    vehicle, and it will flash for
    a few seconds. Then
    the light should go out.
    This means the system is
    ready.

    {CAUTION:
    If the airbag readiness light stays on after you
    start your vehicle, it means the airbag system
    may not be working properly. The airbags in
    your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they
    could even inflate without a crash. To help avoid
    injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle
    serviced right away if the airbag readiness light
    stays on after you start your vehicle.
    The airbag readiness light should flash for a few
    seconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the
    light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will
    be ready to warn you if there is a problem.

    If the airbag readiness light stays on after you start the
    vehicle or comes on when you are driving, your
    airbag system may not work properly. Have your vehicle
    serviced right away.

    3-29

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 142

    Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
    Your vehicle has the passenger sensing system,
    Your rearview mirror has a passenger airbag status
    indicator.

    the status indicator will light either ON or OFF, or either
    the on or off symbol to let you know the status of the
    right front passenger’s frontal airbag.
    If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger
    airbag status indicator, it means that the right front
    passenger’s frontal airbag is enabled (may inflate).

    {CAUTION:
    Passenger Airbag Status Indicator – United States

    Passenger Airbag Status Indicator – Canada

    If the on indicator comes on when you have a
    rear-facing child restraint installed in the right
    front passenger’s seat, it means that the
    passenger sensing system has not turned off
    the passenger’s frontal airbag. A child in a
    rear-facing child restraint can be seriously
    injured or killed if the right front passenger’s
    airbag inflates. This is because the back of the
    rear-facing child restraint would be very close
    to the inflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facing
    child restraint in the right front passenger’s
    seat if the airbag is turned on.

    When the ignition key is turned to RUN or START, the
    passenger airbag status indicator will light ON and
    OFF, or the symbol for on and off, for several seconds
    as a system check. Then, after several more seconds,

    3-30

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 143

    Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate a
    rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun visor says,
    “Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front.” This
    is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great,
    if the airbag deploys.

    {CAUTION:
    Even though the passenger sensing system is
    designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal
    airbag if the system detects a rear-facing child
    restraint, no system is failsafe, and no one can
    guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under
    some unusual circumstance, even though it is
    turned off. We recommend that rear-facing
    child restraints be secured in the rear seat,
    even if the airbag is off.

    If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the airbag
    status indicator, it means that the passenger sensing
    system has turned off the right front passenger’s frontal
    airbag. See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-54
    for more on this, including important safety information.
    If, after several seconds, all status indicator lights
    remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may be a
    problem with the lights or the passenger sensing
    system. See your dealer for service.

    {CAUTION:
    If the off indicator and the airbag readiness
    light ever come on together, it means that
    something may be wrong with the airbag
    system. If this ever happens, have the vehicle
    serviced promptly, because an adult-size
    person sitting in the right front passenger seat
    may not have the protection of the frontal
    airbag. See Airbag Readiness Light on
    page 3-29.

    3-31

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 144

    Charging System Light

    Voltmeter Gage

    The charging system light
    will come on briefly when
    you turn on the ignition,
    but the engine is not
    running, as a check to
    show you it is working.

    It should go out once the engine is running. If it stays on,
    or comes on while you are driving, you may have a
    problem with the charging system. It could indicate that
    you have problems with a generator drive belt, or another
    electrical problem. Have it checked right away. Driving
    while this light is on could drain your battery.
    If you must drive a short distance with the light on, be
    certain to turn off all your accessories, such as the radio
    and air conditioner.

    United States

    Canada

    When your engine is not running, but the ignition is in
    RUN, this gage shows your battery’s state of charge in
    DC volts.
    When the engine is running, the gage shows the
    condition of the charging system. Readings between the
    low and high warning zones indicate the normal operating
    range.

    3-32

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 145

    Readings in the low warning zone may occur when a
    large number of electrical accessories are operating in
    the vehicle and the engine is left idling for an
    extended period. This condition is normal since the
    charging system is not able to provide full power
    at engine idle. As engine speeds are increased, this
    condition should correct itself as higher engine speeds
    allow the charging system to create maximum power.

    Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
    two parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can still
    work and stop you. For good braking, though, you
    need both parts working well.
    If the warning light comes on, there could be a brake
    problem. Have your brake system inspected right away.

    You can only drive for a short time with the reading
    in either warning zone. If you must drive, turn off
    all unnecessary accessories.
    Readings in either warning zone indicate a possible
    problem in the electrical system. Have the vehicle
    serviced as soon as possible.

    Brake System Warning Light
    When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
    will come on when you set your parking brake. The
    light will stay on if your parking brake doesn’t release
    fully. If it stays on after your parking brake is fully
    released, it means you have a brake problem. A chime
    may also sound when the light comes on.

    United States

    Canada

    This light should come on briefly when you turn the
    ignition key to RUN. If it doesn’t come on then, have it
    fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there’s a
    problem.

    3-33

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 146

    If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the
    road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is
    harder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer to the
    floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on,
    have the vehicle towed for service. See Towing
    Your Vehicle on page 4-34.

    {CAUTION:
    Your brake system may not be working
    properly if the brake system warning light is
    on. Driving with the brake system warning light
    on can lead to an accident. If the light is still
    on after you have pulled off the road and
    stopped carefully, have the vehicle towed for
    service.

    Anti-Lock Brake System Warning
    Light
    With the anti-lock brake
    system, this light will come
    on when you start your
    engine and may stay on for
    several seconds, that is
    normal. A chime may also
    sound when the light
    comes on.
    If the light stays on, or comes on when you are driving,
    your vehicle needs service. If the regular brake system
    warning light is not on, you still have brakes, but you do
    not have anti-lock brakes. If the regular brake system
    warning light is also on, you do not have anti-lock brakes
    and there is a problem with your regular brakes. See
    Brake System Warning Light on page 3-33 earlier in this
    section.
    The anti-lock brake system warning light should come
    on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If
    the light does not come on then, have it fixed so it will
    be ready to warn you if there is a problem.

    3-34

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 147

    Engine Coolant Temperature Gage

    Malfunction Indicator Lamp
    Check Engine Light
    Your vehicle is equipped
    with a computer which
    monitors operation of the
    fuel, ignition, and emission
    control systems.

    United States

    Canada

    This gage shows the engine coolant temperature. If the
    gage pointer moves into the red area, the engine
    coolant has overheated.
    If you have been operating your vehicle under normal
    driving conditions, you should pull off the road, stop your
    vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible.
    See Engine Overheating on page 5-25.

    This system is called OBD II (On-Board
    Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to
    assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the life
    of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner environment.
    The check engine light comes on to indicate that there is
    a problem and service is required. Malfunctions often will
    be indicated by the system before any problem is
    apparent. This may prevent more serious damage to your
    vehicle. This system is also designed to assist your
    service technician in correctly diagnosing any
    malfunction.
    Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with this
    light on, after awhile, your emission controls may not
    work as well, your fuel economy may not be as good,
    and your engine may not run as smoothly. This could
    lead to costly repairs that may not be covered by
    your warranty.
    3-35

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 148

    Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
    transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of
    your vehicle or the replacement of the original tires
    with other than those of the same Tire Performance
    Criteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission
    controls and may cause this light to come on.
    Modifications to these systems could lead to costly
    repairs not covered by your warranty. This may
    also result in a failure to pass a required Emission
    Inspection/Maintenance test.
    This light should come on, as a check to show you it is
    working, when the ignition is on and the engine is
    not running. If the light does not come on, have it
    repaired. This light will also come on during a
    malfunction in one of two ways:

    • Light Flashing — A misfire condition has been
    detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions
    and may damage the emission control system on
    your vehicle. Diagnosis and service may be
    required.

    If the Light is Flashing
    The following may prevent more serious damage to
    your vehicle:






    Reducing vehicle speed
    Avoiding hard accelerations
    Avoiding steep uphill grades
    If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of
    cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible

    If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,
    see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.
    If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
    stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.
    Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart
    the engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If the
    Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is still flashing,
    follow the previous steps, and see your dealer for
    service as soon as possible.

    • Light On Steady — An emission control system
    malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
    Diagnosis and service may be required.

    3-36

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 149

    If the Light Is On Steady

    Have you recently changed brands of fuel?

    You may be able to correct the emission system
    malfunction by considering the following:

    If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. See
    Gasoline Octane on page 5-4. Poor fuel quality will
    cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed.
    You may notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling
    when you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation
    on acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration. (These
    conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)
    This will be detected by the system and cause the
    light to turn on.

    Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
    If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install
    the cap. See Filling the Tank on page 5-6. The
    diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
    been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing
    fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
    A few driving trips with the cap properly installed
    should turn the light off.
    Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
    If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition
    will usually be corrected when the electrical system
    dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.

    If you experience one or more of these conditions,
    change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least
    one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
    If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
    your dealer can check the vehicle. Your dealer has
    the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any
    mechanical or electrical problems that may have
    developed.

    3-37

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 150

    Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
    Programs

    Oil Pressure Gage

    Some state/provincial and local governments have or
    may begin programs to inspect the emission control
    equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
    inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle
    registration.
    Here are some things you need to know to help your
    vehicle pass an inspection:
    Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check
    engine light is on or not working properly.
    Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD
    (on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical
    emission control systems have not been completely
    diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be
    considered not ready for inspection. This can happen if
    you have recently replaced your battery or if your
    battery has run down. The diagnostic system is
    designed to evaluate critical emission control systems
    during normal driving. This may take several days
    of routine driving. If you have done this and your vehicle
    still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD
    system readiness, your GM dealer can prepare the
    vehicle for inspection.

    United States

    Canada

    The oil pressure gage shows the engine oil pressure in
    psi (pounds per square inch) when the engine is
    running. Canadian vehicles indicate pressure in
    kPa (kilopascals).
    Oil pressure may vary with engine speed, outside
    temperature and oil viscosity, but readings above the
    low pressure zone indicate the normal operating range.
    A reading in the low pressure zone may be caused
    by a dangerously low oil level or other problems causing
    low oil pressure.

    3-38

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 151

    Change Engine Oil Light

    {CAUTION:
    Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low.
    If you do, your engine can become so hot that
    it catches fire. You or others could be burned.
    Check your oil as soon as possible and have
    your vehicle serviced.
    Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance may
    damage the engine. The repairs would not be covered
    by your warranty. Always follow the maintenance
    schedule in this manual for changing engine oil.

    When this light comes on,
    it means that an oil change
    and other maintenance
    procedures are required for
    your vehicle.

    See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4 and Engine
    Oil on page 5-14 for more information.
    Once the engine oil has been changed, the change
    engine oil light must be reset. Until it is reset, the light
    will be displayed when the engine is on. See Engine Oil
    Life System on page 5-17 for more information.

    3-39

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 152

    Security Light

    Reduced Engine Power Light
    This light will come on
    briefly when you turn the
    key toward START.

    See PASS-Key® III Operation on page 2-18 for
    additional information regarding the security light.

    Cruise Control Light
    The cruise light appears
    whenever you set your
    cruise control.

    This light is displayed
    when a noticeable
    reduction in the vehicle’s
    performance may occur.

    The vehicle may be driven at a reduced speed when
    the reduced engine power light is on but acceleration
    and speed may be reduced. The performance may
    be reduced until the next time you drive your vehicle.
    If this light stays on, see your dealer as soon as possible
    for diagnosis and repair.
    This light may also come on if there is a problem with
    the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If this
    happens, take the vehicle in for service as soon
    as possible.

    3-40

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 153

    Highbeam On Light
    This light will come on
    when the high-beam
    headlamps are in use.

    The service all-wheel drive light comes on to indicate
    that there may be a problem with the drive system and
    service is required. Malfunctions can be indicated by
    the system before any problem is apparent, which may
    prevent serious damage to the vehicle. This system
    is also designed to assist your dealer in correctly
    diagnosing a malfunction.

    Check Gages Warning Light
    See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-8.

    Service All-Wheel Drive Light
    This light should come on
    briefly when you turn on
    the ignition, as a check to
    show you it is working.

    The check gages light will
    come on briefly when you
    are starting the engine.

    If the light comes on and stays on while you are driving,
    check your coolant temperature and engine oil
    pressure gages to see if they are in the warning zones.

    3-41

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 154

    Gate Ajar Light

    When the ignition is on, the fuel gage tells you about
    how much fuel you have remaining.
    If this light comes on, your
    liftgate or liftglass is not
    completely shut.

    Here are four things that some owners ask about. None
    of these show a problem with your fuel gage:

    • At the gas station, the gas pump shuts off before
    the gage reads full.

    • It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the

    Close the liftgate or liftglass. Never drive with the liftgate
    or liftglass even partially open.

    Fuel Gage

    gage indicated. For example, the gage may have
    indicated the tank was half full, but it actually took a
    little more or less than half the tank’s capacity to
    fill the tank.

    • The gage moves a little when you turn a corner or
    speed up.

    • The gage doesn’t go back to empty when you turn
    off the ignition.

    United States

    Canada

    3-42

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 155

    Low Fuel Warning Light

    Driver Information Center (DIC)

    The light next to the fuel gage will come on briefly when
    you are starting the engine.

    The Driver Information Center (DIC) display is located
    on the instrument panel cluster, below the speedometer.
    The DIC buttons are located on the center of the
    instrument panel, above the radio. The DIC can display
    information such as the trip odometer, fuel economy,
    customization features, and warning/status messages.

    This light comes on when the fuel tank is low on fuel.
    To turn it off, add fuel to the fuel tank. See Fuel on
    page 5-4.

    Check Gas Cap Light
    If equipped, this light will
    come on if your gas cap is
    not securely fastened.

    r (Fuel Information):
    See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-35 for more
    information.

    Press this button to display the
    fuel range, fuel used, average fuel economy, and
    engine oil life. See DIC Operation and Displays on
    page 3-44 for more information.

    3 (Trip Information): Press this button to display
    the odometer, trip odometers, and timer. See DIC
    Operation and Displays on page 3-44 for more
    information.

    3-43

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 156

    | (Hazard): Press this button to turn the hazard
    warning flashers on and off. See Hazard Warning
    Flashers on page 3-6 for more information.
    q (Customization):

    The DIC has different modes which can be accessed by
    pressing the four DIC buttons located on the center
    of the instrument panel, above the radio. These buttons
    are fuel information, trip information, customization,
    and select. The button functions are detailed in
    the following pages.

    Press this button to access the
    vehicle settings menu and customize the personal
    settings on your vehicle. See DIC Vehicle Customization
    on page 3-50 for more information.

    Fuel Information Button

    r (Select):

    r (Fuel Information):

    Press this button to reset certain DIC
    functions and set your customization settings.
    Pressing any of the four DIC buttons will acknowledge
    DIC messages and clear them from the DIC display.

    DIC Operation and Displays
    The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. After a short
    delay the DIC will display the information that was
    last displayed before the engine was turned off.
    If a problem is detected, a warning message will appear
    on the display. Pressing the trip stem on the instrument
    panel cluster or any of the DIC buttons will acknowledge
    any warning or service messages.
    You should take any message that appears on the
    display seriously and remember that clearing the
    message will only make the message disappear, not
    correct the problem.

    Press this button to scroll
    through the fuel range, fuel used, average fuel economy,
    and the engine oil life system.
    Fuel Range: Press the fuel information button until
    RANGE appears on the display. This mode shows the
    remaining distance you can drive without refueling.
    It is based on fuel economy and the fuel remaining in
    the tank. The display will show LOW if the fuel level
    is low.
    The fuel economy data used to determine fuel range is
    an average of recent driving conditions. As your
    driving conditions change, this data is gradually updated.
    Fuel range cannot be reset.
    Fuel Used: Press the fuel information button until
    FUEL USED appears on the display. This mode shows
    the number of gallons or liters of fuel used since the
    last reset of this menu item. To reset the fuel used
    information, press and hold the select button for
    one second while FUEL USED is displayed.

    3-44

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 157

    Average Fuel Economy: Press the fuel information
    button until AVG. ECON appears on the display.
    This mode shows how many miles per gallon (MPG),
    kilometers per liter (km/L), or liters per 100 kilometers
    (L/100 km) your vehicle is getting based on current and
    past driving conditions.
    Press and hold the select button for one second while
    AVG. ECON is displayed to reset the average fuel
    economy. Average fuel economy will then be calculated
    starting from that point. If the average fuel economy
    is not reset, it will be continually updated each time
    you drive.
    Engine Oil Life System: Press the fuel information
    button until ENGINE OIL LIFE appears on the display.
    The engine oil life system shows an estimate of the
    oil’s remaining useful life. It will show 100% when the
    system is reset after an oil change. It will alert you
    to change your oil on a schedule consistent with your
    driving conditions.
    Always reset the engine oil life system after an oil
    change. To reset the engine oil life system, see Engine
    Oil Life System on page 5-17.
    In addition to the engine oil life system monitoring the
    oil life, additional maintenance is recommended in
    the Maintenance Schedule in this manual. See Engine
    Oil on page 5-14 and Scheduled Maintenance on
    page 6-4.

    Trip Information Button
    3 (Trip Information): Press this button to scroll
    through the odometer, trip odometers, and timer.
    Odometer: Press the trip information button until
    ODOMETER appears on the display. This mode shows
    the total distance the vehicle has been driven in
    either miles or kilometers. Pressing the trip stem located
    on the instrument panel cluster with the vehicle off
    will also display the odometer.
    Trip A: Press the trip information button until TRIP A
    appears on the display. This mode shows the current
    distance traveled since the last reset for TRIP A in either
    miles or kilometers.
    Trip B: Press the trip information button until TRIP B
    appears on the display. This mode shows the current
    distance traveled since the last reset for TRIP B in either
    miles or kilometers.
    To reset TRIP A or TRIP B information, press and hold
    the select button for one second while in one of the
    trip modes. This will reset the information for TRIP A or
    TRIP B.

    3-45

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 158

    You can also reset the TRIP A or TRIP B while they are
    displayed by pressing the trip stem. If you press and
    hold the trip stem or the select button for four seconds,
    the display will show the distance traveled since the
    last ignition cycle for TRIP A or TRIP B.
    Timer: The DIC can be used as a timer. Press the
    select button while TIMER is displayed to start the timer.
    The display will show the amount of time that has
    passed since the timer was last reset, not including time
    the ignition is off. Time will continue to be counted as
    long as the ignition is on, even if another display is being
    shown on the DIC. The timer will record up to 99 hours,
    59 minutes, and 59 seconds (99:59:59), after which
    the display will roll back to zero.
    To stop the counting of time, press the select button
    briefly while TIMER is displayed.
    To reset the timer to zero, press and hold the select
    button while TIMER is displayed.

    Customization Button
    q (Customization):

    Press this button to access the
    VEHICLE SETTINGS menu and customize the settings
    to your vehicle. See DIC Vehicle Customization on
    page 3-50 for more information.

    Select Button
    r (Select): Press this button to reset certain DIC
    functions, turn off or acknowledge messages on the DIC
    display, and set your customization settings. For
    example, this button will allow you to reset the trip
    odometers, turn off the FUEL LEVEL LOW message,
    and scroll through and select the desired language
    information is displayed in the DIC.

    DIC Warnings and Messages
    Messages are displayed on the DIC to notify the driver
    that the status of the vehicle has changed and that
    some action may be needed by the driver to correct the
    condition. More than one message may appear at
    one time. They will appear one after the other. Some
    messages may not require immediate action but
    you should press the trip stem on the instrument panel
    cluster or any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge
    that you received the message and clear it from the
    display. Some messages cannot be cleared from
    the display because they are more urgent. These
    messages require action before they can be removed
    from the DIC display. The following are the possible
    messages that can be displayed and some information
    about them.

    3-46

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 159

    BATTERY NOT CHARGING

    DRIVER DOOR AJAR

    If the battery is not charging during operation, this
    message will appear on the DIC. Driving with this
    problem could drain your battery. Have the electrical
    system checked by your Saab dealer as soon as
    possible. See Voltmeter Gage on page 3-32. Press the
    select button to acknowledge this message and clear
    it from the DIC display.

    If the driver’s door is not fully closed, this message will
    appear on the display and you will hear a chime.
    Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the door for
    obstacles, and close the door again. Check to see if the
    message still appears on the DIC. Press the select
    button to acknowledge this message and clear it from
    the DIC display.

    CHECK WASHER FLUID

    ENGINE COOLANT HOT/ENGINE
    OVERHEATED

    If the washer fluid level is low, this message will appear
    on the DIC. Adding washer fluid will clear the message.
    See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5-34. Press
    the select button to acknowledge this message and clear
    it from the DIC display.

    CURB VIEW ACTIVATED
    The CURB VIEW ACTIVATED message is displayed
    when the passenger outside rearview mirror moves into
    the curb view position. See Outside Curb View Assist
    Mirror on page 2-33 for more information.

    If the cooling system temperature gets hot, this message
    will appear in the DIC and you will hear a chime. See
    Engine Overheating on page 5-25 for the proper course
    of action. This message will clear when the coolant
    temperature drops to a safe operating temperature.
    Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine
    is overheating, severe engine damage may occur.
    If an overheat warning appears on the instrument
    panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon as
    possible. Do not increase the engine speed above
    normal idling speed. See Engine Overheating
    on page 5-25 for more information.

    3-47

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 160

    FRONT FOG LAMPS OFF

    ICE POSSIBLE

    If the fog lamps are turned off, this message will appear
    on the DIC. The message will clear after 10 seconds.
    If you turn on the high-beam headlamps, the fog lamps
    will also turn off and this message will appear on the
    DIC. The fog lamps will turn back on again when
    you switch back to low-beam headlamps. See Fog
    Lamps on page 3-17 and Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
    on page 3-7 for more information.

    If the outside temperature reaches a level where ice
    could form on the roadway, this message may appear
    on the DIC. If the temperature rises to a safe level,
    the message will clear. Press the select button to
    acknowledge this message and clear it from the DIC
    display.

    FRONT FOG LAMPS ON

    If a remote keyless entry transmitter battery is low, this
    message will appear on the DIC. The battery needs
    to be replaced in the transmitter. See “Battery
    Replacement” under Remote Keyless Entry System
    Operation on page 2-6. Press the select button to
    acknowledge this message and clear it from the DIC
    display.

    If the fog lamps are turned on, this message will appear
    on the DIC. The message will clear after 10 seconds. See
    Fog Lamps on page 3-17 and Turn Signal/Multifunction
    Lever on page 3-7 for more information.

    FUEL LEVEL LOW
    If the fuel level is low in the vehicle’s gas tank this
    message will appear on the DIC and you will hear a
    chime. Refuel as soon as possible. Press the select
    button to acknowledge this message and clear it from
    the DIC display. See Low Fuel Warning Light on
    page 3-43, Filling the Tank on page 5-6 and Fuel on
    page 5-4 for more information.

    KEY FOB # BATTERY LOW

    LEFT REAR DOOR AJAR
    If the driver’s side rear door is not fully closed this
    message will appear on the display and you will hear a
    chime. Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the door
    for obstacles, and close the door again. Check to see if
    the message still appears on the DIC. Press the
    select button to acknowledge this message and clear it
    from the DIC display.

    3-48

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 161

    OIL PRESSURE LOW/STOP ENGINE

    REAR ACCESS OPEN

    If low oil pressure levels occur, this message will
    be displayed on the DIC. Stop the vehicle as soon as
    safely possible and do not operate it until the cause
    of the low oil pressure has been corrected. Check your
    oil as soon as possible and have your vehicle serviced
    by your Saab dealer. See Engine Oil on page 5-14.

    If the liftgate or liftglass is open while the ignition is in
    RUN, this message will appear on the DIC and you will
    hear a chime. Turn off the vehicle and check the
    liftgate and liftglass. See Liftgate/Liftglass on page 2-13.
    Restart the vehicle and check for the message on the
    DIC display. Press the select button to acknowledge this
    message and clear it from the DIC display.

    Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine
    oil pressure is low, severe engine damage may
    occur. If a low oil pressure warning appears on the
    Driver Information Center (DIC), stop the vehicle
    as soon as possible. Do not drive the vehicle until
    the cause of the low oil pressure is corrected.
    See Engine Oil on page 5-14 for more information.

    PASSENGER DOOR AJAR
    If the passenger’s door is not fully closed, this message
    will appear on the display and you will hear a chime.
    Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the door for
    obstacles, and close the door again. Check to see if the
    message still appears on the DIC. Press the select
    button to acknowledge this message and clear it from
    the DIC display.

    RIGHT REAR DOOR AJAR
    If the passenger’s side rear door is not fully closed this
    message will appear on the display and you will
    hear a chime. Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the
    door for obstacles, and close the door again. Check
    to see if the message still appears on the DIC. Press the
    select button to acknowledge this message and clear
    it from the DIC display.

    SERVICE AIR BAG
    If there is a problem with the airbag system this
    message will be displayed on the DIC. Have your
    Saab dealer inspect the system for problems. See
    Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-29 and Airbag
    System on page 1-45 for more information. Press the
    select button to acknowledge this message and clear it
    from the DIC display.

    3-49

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 162

    SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM

    TURN SIGNAL ON

    If a problem occurs with the brake system this message
    will appear on the DIC. If this message appears, stop
    as soon as possible and turn off the vehicle. Restart the
    vehicle and check for the message on the DIC display.
    If the message is still displayed, or appears again when
    you begin driving, the brake system needs service.
    See your Saab dealer.

    If a turn signal is left on for 3/4 of a mile (1.2 km), this
    message will appear on the display and you will hear a
    chime. Move the turn signal/multifunction lever to the
    off position. Press the select button to acknowledge this
    message and clear it from the DIC display.

    TIGHTEN FUEL CAP
    If the vehicle’s fuel cap is not tightened properly, this
    message may appear on the DIC and a chime will
    sound. Fully reinstall the fuel cap. See Filling the Tank
    on page 5-6. The diagnostic system can determine
    if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed.
    A loose or missing fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate
    into the atmosphere. The DIC message will remain
    on until the message is cancelled with the return button
    on the steering wheel. The DIC message will also be
    cancelled if the ignition is turned off.
    The DIC message and the Service Engine Soon light
    may come on again during a second trip if the fuel cap is
    still not tightened properly. See Malfunction Indicator
    Lamp on page 3-35 for more information.

    DIC Vehicle Customization
    Your vehicle may have customization capabilities that
    allow you to program some features to one setting
    based on your preference. All of the customizable
    options listed may not be available on your vehicle.
    Only the options available will be displayed on
    your Driver Information Center (DIC).
    The default settings for the customization features were
    set when your vehicle left the factory, but may have
    been changed from their default state since then.
    To change feature preferences, make sure the ignition
    is on and the vehicle is in PARK (P).
    Press the customization button to scroll through the
    available customizable options.

    3-50

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 163

    Lock Doors
    Press the customization button until LOCK DOORS: IN
    GEAR appears in the display. To select your preference
    for automatic locking, press the select button while LOCK
    DOORS: IN GEAR is displayed on the DIC. Pressing the
    select button will scroll through the following choices:
    LOCK DOORS: IN GEAR (default): The doors will lock
    when the vehicle is shifted out of PARK (P).
    LOCK DOORS: WITH SPEED: The doors will lock
    when the vehicle speed is above 8 mph (13 km/h) for
    three seconds.
    Choose one of the available options and press the
    customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
    select it and move on to the next feature. For more
    information on automatic door locks, see Programmable
    Automatic Door Locks on page 2-10.

    Unlock Doors
    Press the customization button until UNLOCK DOORS:
    IN PARK appears in the display. To select your
    preference for automatic unlocking, press the select
    button while UNLOCK DOORS: IN PARK is displayed on
    the DIC. Pressing the select button will scroll through the
    following choices:
    UNLOCK DOORS: IN PARK (default): All of the doors
    will unlock when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).

    UNLOCK DRIVER: IN PARK: The driver’s door will be
    unlocked when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).
    UNLOCK DOORS: KEY OUT: All of the doors
    will unlock when the key is taken out of the ignition.
    UNLOCK DOORS: MANUALLY: The doors will not be
    unlocked automatically.
    Choose one of the available options and press the
    customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
    select it and move on to the next feature. For more
    information on automatic door locks, see Programmable
    Automatic Door Locks on page 2-10.

    Lock Feedback
    Press the customization button until LOCK FEEDBACK:
    BOTH appears in the display. To select your preference
    for the feedback you receive when locking the vehicle
    with the remote keyless entry transmitter, press the
    select button while LOCK FEEDBACK: BOTH is
    displayed on the DIC. Pressing the select button will
    scroll through the following choices:
    LOCK FEEDBACK: BOTH (default): The parking
    lamps will flash each time you press the button with the
    lock symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter
    and the horn will chirp the second time you press the
    lock button.

    3-51

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 164

    LOCK FEEDBACK: OFF: There will be no feedback
    when locking the vehicle.
    LOCK FEEDBACK: LAMPS: The parking lamps will
    flash each time you press the button with the lock
    symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter.
    LOCK FEEDBACK: HORN: The horn will chirp the
    second time you press the button with the lock symbol
    on the remote keyless entry transmitter.
    Choose one of the available options and press the
    customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
    select it and move on to the next feature.

    Unlock Feedback
    Press the customization button until UNLOCK
    FEEDBACK: LAMPS appears in the display. To select
    your preference for the feedback you will receive
    when unlocking the vehicle with the remote keyless
    entry transmitter, press the select button while UNLOCK
    FEEDBACK: LAMPS is displayed on the DIC. Pressing
    the select button will scroll through the following
    choices:
    UNLOCK FEEDBACK: LAMPS (default): The parking
    lamps will flash each time you press the button with
    the unlock symbol on the remote keyless entry
    transmitter.

    UNLOCK FEEDBACK: HORN: The horn will chirp the
    second time you press the button with the unlock
    symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter.
    UNLOCK FEEDBACK: BOTH: The parking lamps will
    flash each time you press the button with the unlock
    symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter and the
    horn will chirp the second time you press the unlock
    button.
    UNLOCK FEEDBACK: OFF: There will be no feedback
    when unlocking the vehicle.
    Choose one of the available options and press the
    customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
    select it and move on to the next feature.

    Headlamp Delay
    Press the customization button until HEADLAMP
    DELAY: 10 SEC appears in the display. To select your
    preference for how long the headlamps will stay on
    when you turn off the vehicle, press the select button
    while HEADLAMP DELAY: 10 SEC is displayed on
    the DIC. Pressing the select button will scroll through
    the following choices:






    HEADLAMP DELAY: 10 SEC (default)
    HEADLAMP DELAY: 20 SEC
    HEADLAMP DELAY: 40 SEC
    HEADLAMP DELAY: 1 MIN

    3-52

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 165

    • HEADLAMP DELAY: 2 MIN
    • HEADLAMP DELAY: 3 MIN
    • HEADLAMP DELAY: OFF
    The amount of time you choose will be the amount of
    time that the headlamps stay on after you turn off
    the vehicle. If you choose OFF, the headlamps will turn
    off as soon as you turn off the vehicle.
    Choose one of the available options and press the
    customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
    select it and move on to the next feature.

    Perimeter Lights
    Press the customization button until PERIMETER
    LIGHTS: ON appears in the display. To select your
    preference for perimeter lighting, press the select button
    while PERIMETER LIGHTS: ON is displayed on the
    DIC. Pressing the select button will scroll through
    the following choices:
    PERIMETER LIGHTS: ON (default): The headlamps
    and back-up lamps will come on for 40 seconds, if
    it is dark enough outside, when you unlock the vehicle
    with the remote keyless entry transmitter.

    PERIMETER LIGHTS: OFF: The perimeter lights will
    not come on when you unlock the vehicle with the
    remote keyless entry transmitter.
    Choose one of the available options and press the
    customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
    select it and move on to the next feature.

    Easy Exit Seat
    Press the customization button until EASY EXIT SEAT:
    OFF appears in the display. To select your preference
    for seat position exit, press the select button while EASY
    EXIT SEAT: OFF is displayed on the DIC. Pressing
    the select button will scroll through the following choices:
    EASY EXIT SEAT: OFF (default): No seat exit recall
    will occur.
    EASY EXIT SEAT: ON: The driver’s seat will move to
    the exit position when the key is removed from the
    ignition.
    Choose one of the available options and press the
    customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
    select it and move on to the next feature. For more
    information on seat position exit, see “Easy Exit Seat”
    under Memory Seat on page 2-45.

    3-53

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 166

    Curb View

    Alarm Warning

    Press the customization button until CURB VIEW: OFF
    appears in the display. To select your preference for
    curb view, press the select button while CURB VIEW:
    OFF is displayed on the DIC. Pressing the select button
    will scroll through the following choices:

    Press the customization button until ALARM WARNING:
    BOTH appears in the display. To select your preference
    for alarm warning, press the select button while
    ALARM WARNING: BOTH is displayed on the DIC.
    Pressing the select button will scroll through the
    following choices:

    CURB VIEW: OFF (default): The passenger’s outside
    mirror will not be tilted down when the vehicle is
    shifted into REVERSE (R).
    CURB VIEW: PASSENGER: The passenger’s outside
    mirror will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted
    into REVERSE (R).
    When the vehicle is placed in PARK (P) or in any
    forward gear, the mirror will return to the normal driving
    position, following a short delay.
    Choose one of the available options and press the
    customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
    select it and move on to the next feature. For more
    information on tilt mirror in reverse, see Outside Curb
    View Assist Mirror on page 2-33.

    ALARM WARNING: BOTH (default): The headlamps
    will flash and the horn will chirp when the alarm is
    active.
    ALARM WARNING: HORN: The horn will chirp when
    the alarm is active.
    ALARM WARNING: LAMPS: The headlamps will flash
    when the alarm is active.
    ALARM WARNING: OFF: There will be no alarm
    warning on activation.
    Choose one of the available options and press the
    customization button while your choice is displayed on
    the DIC to select it and move on to the next feature.
    For more information on alarm warning type, see
    Content Theft-Deterrent on page 2-16.

    3-54

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 167

    Language

    Units

    Press the customization button until LANGUAGE:
    ENGLISH appears in the display. To select your
    preference for display language, press the select button
    while LANGUAGE: ENGLISH is displayed on the
    DIC. Pressing the select button will scroll through the
    following choices:

    Press the customization button until UNITS: U.S.
    (ENGLISH) appears in the display. To select English or
    metric, press the select button while UNITS: U.S.
    (ENGLISH) is displayed on the DIC. Pressing the select
    button will scroll through the following choices:

    • ENGLISH (default)
    • FRANCAIS (French)
    • ESPANOL (Spanish)
    Choose one of the available options and press the
    customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
    select it and move on to the next feature.
    If you accidentally choose a language that you do not
    want or understand, press and hold the customization
    button and the trip information button at the same
    time. The DIC will begin scrolling through the languages
    in their particular language. English will be in English,
    Francais will be in French, and Espanol will be in
    Spanish. Release both buttons when the desired
    language appears. All DIC messages will then appear in
    that language.
    You can also scroll through the different languages by
    pressing and holding the trip reset stem for four seconds,
    as long as you are in the odometer mode.

    • UNITS: U.S. (ENGLISH) (default)
    • UNITS: METRIC (km/L)
    • UNITS: METRIC (L/100 km)
    If U.S. (ENGLISH) is chosen, all information will be
    displayed in English units. For example, distance will be
    displayed in miles and fuel economy in miles per
    gallon (MPG). If METRIC (km/L) is chosen, all
    information will be displayed in metric units. For
    example, distance will be displayed in kilometers and
    fuel economy in kilometers per liter (km/L). If METRIC
    (L/100 km) is chosen, all information will be displayed in
    metric units. For example, distance will be displayed
    in kilometers and fuel economy in liters per
    100 kilometers (L/100 km).
    Choose one of the available options and press the
    customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
    select it and exit out of the customizable options.

    3-55

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 168

    Audio System(s)
    Notice: Before adding any sound equipment to your
    vehicle, such as an audio system, CD player, CB
    radio, mobile telephone, or two-way radio, make sure
    that it can be added by checking with your dealer.
    Also, check federal rules covering mobile radio and
    telephone units. If sound equipment can be added, it
    is very important to do it properly. Added sound
    equipment may interfere with the operation of your
    vehicle’s engine, radio, or other systems, and even
    damage them. Your vehicle’s systems may interfere
    with the operation of sound equipment that has been
    added.

    Figure out which audio system is in your vehicle, find
    out what your audio system can do, and how to operate
    all of its controls.

    Setting the Time
    Press and hold H until the correct hour appears on the
    display. AM or PM will appear on the display (Radio
    with CD (UpLevel, MP3, and Six-Disc CD)). Press and
    hold M until the correct minute appears on the
    display. The time can be set with the ignition on or off.

    Notice: The chime signals related to seat belts,
    parking brake, and other functions of your vehicle
    operate through the radio/entertainment system. If
    that equipment is replaced or additional equipment is
    added to your vehicle, the chimes may not work.
    Make sure that replacement or additional equipment
    is compatible with your vehicle before installing it.

    3-56

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 169

    Radio with CD

    Playing the Radio
    P (Power/Volume):

    Press this knob to turn the

    system on and off.
    Turn this knob to increase or to decrease the volume.
    DISP (Display): When the ignition is turned off,
    press this knob to display the time.
    For XM™ (if equipped), press the DISP button while in
    XM™ mode to retrieve four different categories of
    information related to the current song or channel:
    Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY, Channel
    Number/Channel Name.

    XM™ Satellite Radio Service

    To change the default on the display, press the DISP
    button until you see the display you want, then hold this
    knob for two seconds. The radio will produce one beep
    and the selected display will now be the default.

    XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the
    48 contiguous United States. XM™ offers over
    100 coast-to-coast channels including music, news,
    sports, talk, and children’s programming. XM™ provides
    digital quality audio and text information that includes
    song title and artist name. A service fee is required
    in order to receive the XM™ service. For more
    information, contact XM™ at www.xmradio.com or call
    1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

    3-57

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 170

    AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automatic
    volume, the audio system adjusts automatically to make
    up for road and wind noise as you drive.
    Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to
    select LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH. Each higher setting will
    allow for more volume compensation at faster vehicle
    speeds. Then as you drive, automatic volume increases
    the volume, as necessary, to overcome noise at any
    speed. The volume level should always sound the same
    to you as you drive. NONE will appear on the display if
    the radio cannot determine the vehicle speed. To turn
    automatic volume off, press this button until AVOL OFF
    appears on the display.

    Finding a Station
    BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
    AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). The display will
    show the selection.

    e (Tune): Turn this knob to select radio stations.
    © SEEK ¨: Press and release the right or the left

    To scan stations, press and hold either arrow for more
    than two seconds. SCAN will appear on the display and
    the radio will produce one beep. The radio will go to a
    station, play for a few seconds, then go on to the next
    station. Press either arrow again or one of the
    pushbuttons to stop scanning presets.
    To scan preset stations, press and hold either arrow for
    more than four seconds. PSCN will appear on the display
    and the radio will produce two beeps. The radio will go to
    a preset station, play for a few seconds, then go on to the
    next preset station. Press either arrow again or one of the
    pushbuttons to stop scanning presets.
    The radio will only seek and scan stations with a strong
    signal that are in the selected band.

    4 (Information):

    If the current station has a message,
    the information symbol will appear on the display. Press
    this button to see the message. The message may
    display the artist, song title, call in phone numbers, etc.

    arrow to go to the next or to the previous station and stay
    there.

    3-58

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 171

    If the entire message is not displayed, parts of the
    message will appear every three seconds. To scroll
    through the message, press and release the information
    button. A new group of words will appear on the display
    after every press of this button. Once the complete
    message has been displayed, the information symbol will
    disappear from the display until another new message is
    received. The last message can be displayed by pressing
    the information button. You can view the last message
    until a new message is received or a different station is
    tuned to.
    When a message is not available from a station, No Info
    will appear on the display.

    Setting Preset Stations
    Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,
    six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can be programmed
    on the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the
    following steps:
    1. Turn the radio on.
    2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1
    or XM2.

    5. Press and hold one of the six numbered
    pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever that
    numbered pushbutton is pressed, the station
    that was set will return and the equalization that
    was selected will be stored for that pushbutton.
    6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.

    Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
    e (Bass/Treble):

    Push and release this knob until
    BASS or TREB appears on the display. Turn this knob
    to increase or to decrease. The display will show
    the bass or the treble level. If a station is weak or noisy,
    decrease the treble.
    To adjust the bass and the treble to the middle position,
    while in bass or treble, push and hold the tone knob.
    The radio will produce one beep.
    To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
    position, push and hold the tone knob when no tone or
    speaker control is displayed. ALL CENTERED will
    appear on the display and you will hear a beep.

    3. Tune in the desired station.
    4. Press AUTO EQ to select the equalization.

    3-59

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 172

    AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this button
    to select customized equalization settings designed
    for country/western, jazz, talk, pop, rock and classical.
    The equalization one through seven options are included
    only if your vehicle is equipped with the Bose® system.
    Press the AUTO EQ button to select equalization
    settings designed for equalization one through seven.
    To return the bass and treble to the manual mode, push
    and release the tone knob until BASS and TREB
    appears on the display.

    To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
    position, push and hold the tone knob when no tone or
    speaker control is displayed. ALL CENTERED will
    appear on the display and you will hear a beep.

    Finding a Category (CAT) Station
    (XM™ Satellite Radio Service Only)
    To select and find a desired category perform the
    following:

    Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)

    1. Press the CAT button to activate category select
    mode. The current category will appear on the
    display.

    e (Balance/Fade):

    2. Turn the tune knob to select a category.

    To adjust the balance between
    the right and the left speakers, push and release
    this knob until BAL appears on the display. Turn the
    knob to move the sound toward the right or the
    left speakers.
    To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
    speakers, push and release the speaker knob until FAD
    appears on the display. Turn the knob to move the
    sound toward the front or the rear speakers.
    To adjust the balance and the fade to the middle
    position, while in fade or balance, push the tone knob,
    then push it again and hold it until you hear one beep.

    3. Once the desired category is displayed, press either
    SEEK arrow to take you to that category’s first
    station.
    4. To go to another station within that category and
    the category is displayed, press either SEEK
    arrow again. If CAT times out and is no longer on
    the display, go back to Step 1.
    5. Press CAT to exit category select mode or wait for
    CAT to time out.
    If the radio cannot find the desired category, NOT
    FOUND will appear on the display and the radio will
    return to the last station you were listening to.

    3-60

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 173

    Radio Messages
    CAL ERR (Calibration Error): The audio system has
    been calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If CAL
    ERR appears on the display it means that the radio has
    not been configured properly for your vehicle and it must
    be returned to your dealer for service.

    LOC (Locked): This message is displayed when the
    THEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Take your vehicle
    to your dealer for service.
    If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
    corrected, contact your dealer.

    XM™ Radio Messages
    Radio Display
    Message

    Condition

    Action Required

    XL (Explicit Language
    Channels)

    XL on the radio display,
    after the channel name,
    indicates content with
    explicit language.

    These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a
    customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

    Updating

    Updating
    encryption code

    The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, and no
    action is required. This process should take no longer than
    30 seconds.

    No Signl

    Loss of signal

    The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in a
    location that is blocking the XM™ signal. When the vehicle is
    moved into an open area, the signal should return.

    Loading

    Acquiring channel audio
    (after four second delay)

    The radio system is acquiring and processing audio and text
    data. No action is needed. This message should disappear
    shortly.

    Off Air

    Channel not in service

    This channel is not currently in service. Tune to another
    channel.

    3-61

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 174

    XM™ Radio Messages (cont’d)
    Radio Display
    Message

    Condition

    Action Required

    CH Unavl

    Channel no longer
    available

    This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.
    Tune to another station. If this station was one of the
    presets, choose another station for that preset button.

    No Info

    Artist Name/Feature not
    available

    No artist information is available at this time on this
    channel. The system is working properly.

    No Info

    Song/Program Title not
    available

    No song title information is available at this time on this
    channel. The system is working properly.

    No Info

    Category Name not
    available

    No category information is available at this time on this
    channel. The system is working properly.

    No Info

    No Text/Informational
    message available

    No text or informational messages are available at this
    time on this channel. The system is working properly.

    Not Found

    No channel available for
    the chosen category

    There are no channels available for the selected category.
    The system is working properly.

    XM Lock

    Theft lock active

    The XM™ receiver in your vehicle may have previously
    been in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™
    receivers cannot be swapped between vehicles. If this
    message is received after having your vehicle serviced,
    check with your dealer.

    Radio ID

    Radio ID label
    (channel 0)

    If tuned to channel 0, this message will alternate with the
    XM™ Radio eight digit radio ID label. This label is needed
    to activate the service.

    3-62

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 175

    XM™ Radio Messages (cont’d)
    Radio Display
    Message

    Condition

    Action Required

    Unknown

    Radio ID not known
    (should only be if
    hardware failure)

    If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, there
    may be a receiver fault. Consult with your dealer.

    Check XM

    Hardware failure

    If this message does not clear within a short period of time,
    the receiver may have a fault. Consult with your dealer.

    Playing a CD
    Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.
    The player will pull it in and the CD should begin playing.
    If you want to insert a CD with the ignition off, first
    press the eject button or the DISP knob.
    If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
    player it will stay in the player. When the ignition or radio
    is turned on, the CD will start to play where it stopped,
    if it was the last selected audio source.
    When the CD is inserted, the CD symbol will appear on
    the display. As each new track starts to play, the
    track number will appear on the display.
    The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
    CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
    smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.

    If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced
    due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
    of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
    CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
    in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
    loading and ejecting. If these problems occur try a
    known good CD.
    Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caught
    in the CD player.
    If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
    later in this section.
    1 r (Previous): Press this pushbutton to reverse
    within the track.
    2 [ (Next): Press this pushbutton to fast forward
    within the track.

    3-63

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 176

    3 N (Repeat): Press this pushbutton to hear a track
    over again. RPT ON will appear on the display.
    The current track will continue to repeat. Press this
    pushbutton again to turn off repeat play. RPT OFF will
    appear on the display.
    4 y (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the
    tracks in random, rather than sequential, order. RDM ON
    will appear on the display. Press this pushbutton
    again to turn off random play. RDM OFF will appear on
    the display.

    o SEEK p: Press the left arrow to go to the start of
    the current or the previous track. Press the right
    arrow to go to the start of the next track. If a track is
    approximately 10 seconds into its song, press either
    the left or right arrow twice to get to the previous or
    next track.
    To scan tracks, press either arrow for more than
    two seconds until SCAN appears on the display.
    The CD will search the previous or next tracks at
    two seconds per track. Press either arrow to stop
    scanning.

    DISP (Display): Press this button to see how long the
    current track has been playing. The elapsed time of
    the track will appear on the display. To change
    the default on the display, track or elapsed time, press
    this button until you see the display you want, then
    hold the button for two seconds. The radio will produce
    one beep and the selected display will now be the
    default.
    BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
    CD is playing. The inactive CD will remain safely
    inside the radio for future listening.

    B (CD):

    Press this button to play a CD when listening
    to the radio. The CD symbol will appear on the display
    when a CD is loaded.
    AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press EQ to
    select an equalization setting while playing a CD.
    The equalization will be set whenever a CD is played.
    See “EQ” listed previously for more information.
    If you select an EQ setting for your CD, it will be
    activated each time you play a CD.

    Z (Eject):

    Press this button to eject a CD. Eject may
    be activated with either the ignition or radio off. CDs
    may be loaded with the ignition and radio off if this
    button is pressed first.

    3-64

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 177

    Using an MP3 CD

    Root Directory

    MP3 Format

    The root directory will be treated as a folder. If the root
    directory has compressed audio files, the directory
    will be displayed as F1 ROOT. All files contained directly
    under the root directory will be accessed prior to any
    root directory folders. However, playlists (Px) will always
    be accessed before root folders or files.

    This MP3 player will accept MP3 files that were recorded
    on an up to 700 MB CD-R CD. The files can be recorded
    with the following fixed bit rates: 32 kpbs, 40 kpbs,
    56 kpbs, 64 kpbs, 80 kpbs, 96 kpbs, 112 kpbs, 128 kpbs,
    160 kpbs, 192 kpbs, 224 kpbs, 256 kpbs, and 320 kpbs or
    a variable bit rate. Song title, artist name, and album will
    be available when recorded using ID3 tags version 1.
    The player will be able to read and play a maximum of
    50 folders, 50 playlists, 10 sessions, and 255 files. Long
    file, folder, or playlist names or a combination of a large
    number of files and folders or playlists may cause the
    player to be unable to play up to the maximum number of
    files, folders, playlists, or sessions. If you wish to play
    large numbers of files, folders, playlists or sessions
    minimize the length of the file, folder or playlist name.
    You can also play an MP3 CD that was recorded using no
    file folders. The system can support up to 11 folders in
    depth, though, keep the depth of the folders to a minimum
    in order to keep down the complexity and confusion in
    trying to locate a particular folder during playback.
    If a CD contains more than the maximum of 50 folders,
    50 playlists, 10 sessions, and 255 files the player will let
    you access and navigate up to the maximum, but all
    items over the maximum will be ignored.

    Empty Directory or Folder
    If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the
    file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and no
    compressed files directly beneath them, the player will
    advance to the next folder in the file structure that
    contains compressed audio files and the empty folder
    will not be displayed or numbered.

    No Folder
    When the CD contains only compressed files, the files will
    be located under the root folder. The next and previous
    folder functions will have no function on a CD that was
    recorded without folders or playlists. When displaying the
    name of the folder the radio will display ROOT.
    When the CD contains only playlists and compressed
    audio files, but no folders, all files will be located under
    the root folder. The folder down and the folder up
    buttons will search playlists (Px) first and then go to the
    root folder. When the radio displays the name of the
    folder the radio will display ROOT.
    3-65

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 178

    Order of Play
    Tracks will be played in the following order:

    • Play will begin from the first track in the first playlist
    and will continue sequentially through all tracks in
    each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist
    has been played, play will continue from the first
    track of the first playlist.

    • If the CD does not contain any playlists, then play
    will begin from the first track under the root
    directory. When all tracks from the root directory
    have been played, play will continue from files
    according to their numerical listing. After playing the
    last track from the last folder, play will begin
    again at the first track of the first folder or root
    directory.
    When play enters a new folder, the display will not
    automatically show the new folder name unless
    you have chosen the folder mode as the default display.
    See DISP later in this section for more information.
    The new track name will appear on the display.

    File System and Naming
    The song name that will be displayed will be the song
    name that is contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is
    not present in the ID3 tag, then the radio will display the
    file name without the extension (such as .mp3) as the
    track name.

    Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages
    will be shortened. The display will not show parts
    of words on the last page of text and the extension of
    the file name will not be displayed.

    Preprogrammed Playlists
    You can access preprogrammed playlists which were
    created by WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real
    Jukebox™ software, however, you will not have editing
    capability. These playlists will be treated as special
    folders containing compressed audio song files.

    Playing an MP3
    Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
    player will pull it in, and READING will appear on
    the display. The CD should begin playing and the CD
    symbol will appear on the display. If you want to insert a
    CD with the ignition off, first press the eject button or
    the DISP knob.
    If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
    player it will stay in the player. When the ignition or radio
    is turned on, the CD will start to play where it stopped,
    if it was the last selected audio source.
    As each new track starts to play, the track number will
    appear on the display.
    The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
    CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
    smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.

    3-66

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 179

    If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced
    due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
    of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
    CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
    in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
    loading and ejecting. If these problems occur try a
    known good CD.
    Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caught
    in the CD player.
    If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
    later in this section.
    1 s (Reverse): Press this pushbutton to reverse
    within the same track. If this pushbutton is held or
    pressed more than once, the player will continue moving
    backward through the CD.
    2 \ (Fast Forward): Press this pushbutton to fast
    forward within the track. If this pushbutton is held
    or pressed more than once, the player will continue
    moving forward through the CD.
    3 N (Repeat): Press this pushbutton to hear a track
    over again. RPT On will appear on the display. The
    current track will continue to repeat. Press this
    pushbutton again to turn off repeat play. RPT OFF will
    appear on the display.

    4 y (Random): To random the tracks in the current
    folder or playlist, press and release this pushbutton.
    FLDR RDM will appear on the display. Once all of the
    tracks in the current folder or playlist have been
    played the system will move on to the next folder or
    playlist and play all of the tracks in random order.
    To random all the tracks on the CD, press and hold this
    pushbutton for two seconds. You will hear a beep
    and CD RDM will appear on the display. This feature
    will not work with playlists.
    When in random, pressing and releasing either SEEK
    arrow will take you to the next or previous random track.
    Press and release this pushbutton again to turn off
    random play. NO RDM will appear on the display.
    5 ! (Previous Folder): Press this pushbutton to go
    to the first track in the previous folder. Pressing this
    button while in folder random mode will take you to the
    previous folder and random the tracks in that folder.
    6 # (Next Folder): Press this pushbutton to go to the
    first track in the next folder. Pressing this button while
    in folder random mode will take you to the next
    folder and random the tracks in that folder.

    3-67

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 180

    © SEEK ¨: Press the left arrow to go to the start of
    the previous track. Press the right arrow to go to the
    start of the next track. Press either arrow for more than
    two seconds and SCAN will appear on display. The
    radio will scan the previous or next tracks at two tracks
    per second. Release the arrow to stop scanning and
    to play the track.
    DISP (Display): Press this knob to switch between
    track mode, folder/playlist mode, and time of day mode.
    The display will show only eight characters, but there
    can be up to four pages of text. If there are more
    than eight characters in the song, folder, or playlist
    name, pressing this knob within two seconds will take
    you to the next page of text. If there are no other pages
    to be shown, pressing this knob within two seconds
    will take you to the next display mode.

    • Track mode will display the current track number
    and the ID3 tag song name.

    • Folder/playlist mode will display the current folder or
    playlist number and the folder/playlist name.

    • Time of day mode will display the time of day and
    the ID3 tag song name.

    4 (Information):

    INFO will appear on the display
    whenever a current track has ID3 tag information.
    Press this button to display the artist name and album
    contained in the tag. INFO will disappear from the
    display when the information in the ID3 tag has finished.
    BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
    CD is playing. The inactive CD will remain safely
    inside the radio for future listening.

    B (CD):

    Press this button to play a CD when listening
    to the radio. The CD symbol will appear on the display
    when a CD is loaded.
    AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press EQ to
    select an equalization setting while playing a CD.
    The equalization will be set whenever a CD is played.
    See “EQ” listed previously for more information.
    If you select an EQ setting for your CD, it will be
    activated each time you play a CD.

    Z (Eject):

    Press this button to eject a CD. Eject may
    be activated with either the ignition or radio off. CDs
    may be loaded with the ignition and radio off if this
    button is pressed first.

    To change the default on the display, press the DISP
    knob until you see the display you want, then hold
    this knob for two seconds. The radio will produce one
    beep and the selected display will now be the default.

    3-68

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 181

    CD Messages

    Radio with Six-Disc CD

    CHECK CD: If this message appears on the display
    and/or the CD comes out, it could be for one of the
    following reasons:

    • It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
    normal, the CD should play.

    • You are driving on a very rough road. When the
    road becomes smoother, the CD should play.

    • The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
    • The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
    try again.

    • The format of the CD may not be compatible.
    See “MP3 Format” earlier in this section.

    • There may have been a problem while burning
    the CD.

    • The label may be caught in the CD player.
    If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
    try a known good CD.
    If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
    corrected, contact your dealer. If the radio displays
    an error message, write it down and provide it to your
    dealer when reporting the problem.

    XM™ Satellite Radio Service
    XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the
    48 contiguous Untied States. XM™ offers over
    100 coast-to-coast channels including music, news,
    sports, talk, and children’s programming. XM™ provides
    digital quality audio and text information that includes
    song title and artist name. A service fee is required
    in order to receive the XM™ service. For more
    information, contact XM™ at www.xmradio.com or call
    1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

    3-69

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 182

    Playing the Radio
    and off.

    NONE will appear on the display if the radio cannot
    determine the vehicle speed. To turn automatic volume
    off, press this button until AVOL OFF appears on
    the display.

    Turn this knob to increase or to decrease the volume.

    Finding a Station

    DISP (Display): When the ignition is turned off,
    press this knob to display the time.

    BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
    AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). The display will
    show the selection.

    P (Power):

    Press this knob to turn the system on

    For XM™ (if equipped), press the DISP knob while in
    XM™ mode to retrieve four different categories of
    information related to the current song or channel:
    Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY, Channel
    Number/Channel Name.
    To change the default on the display, press the DISP
    knob until you see the display you want, then hold
    this knob for two seconds. The radio will produce one
    beep and the selected display will now be the default.
    AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automatic
    volume, the audio system adjusts automatically to make
    up for road and wind noise as you drive.
    Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to
    select LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH. Each higher setting
    will allow for more volume compensation at faster
    vehicle speeds. Then as you drive, automatic volume
    increases the volume, as necessary, to overcome noise
    at any speed. The volume level should always sound
    the same to you as you drive.

    e (Tune):

    Turn this knob to select radio stations.

    t SEEK u:

    Press and release the right or the left
    arrow to go to the next or to the previous station
    and stay there.
    The radio will only seek stations with a strong signal
    that are in the selected band.
    Press and hold either arrow for more than two seconds.
    SCAN will appear on the display and the radio will
    produce one beep. The radio will go to a station, play
    for a few seconds, then go on to the next station. Press
    either arrow again or one of the pushbuttons to stop
    scanning presets.
    The radio will only scan stations with a strong signal
    that are in the selected band.

    3-70

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 183

    Press and hold this button until PSCN will appear on
    the display and the radio will produce two beeps.
    The radio will go to a preset station, play for a few
    seconds, then go on to the next preset station.
    Press either arrow again or one of the pushbuttons
    to stop scanning presets.

    1-6 (Preset Pushbuttons): Press this button to play
    stations that are programmed on the radio preset
    pushbuttons.

    The radio will only scan preset stations with a strong
    signal that are in the selected band.

    Setting Preset Stations

    4 (Information):

    If the current station has a message,
    the information symbol will appear on the display. Press
    this button to see the message. The message may
    display the artist, song title, call in phone numbers, etc.

    The radio will only seek preset stations with a strong
    signal that are in the selected band.

    Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,
    six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can be programmed
    on the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the
    following steps:
    1. Turn the radio on.

    If the entire message is not displayed, parts of the
    message will appear every three seconds. To scroll
    through the message, press and release the INFO button.
    A new group of words will appear on the display after
    every press of this button. Once the complete message
    has been displayed, the information symbol will
    disappear from the display until another new message is
    received. The last message can be displayed by pressing
    the INFO button. You can view the last message until a
    new message is received or a different station is tuned to.

    2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1
    or XM2.

    When a message is not available from a station, No Info
    will appear on the display.

    6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.

    3. Tune in the desired station.
    4. Press AUTO EQ to select the equalization.
    5. Press and hold one of the six numbered
    pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever that
    numbered pushbutton is pressed, the station
    that was set will return and the equalization that
    was selected will be stored for that pushbutton.

    3-71

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 184

    Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)

    Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)

    e (Bass/Treble):

    Push and release this knob until
    BASS or TREB appears on the display. Turn this knob
    to increase or to decrease. The display will show
    the bass or the treble level. If a station is weak or noisy,
    decrease the treble.

    e (Balance/Fade):

    To adjust the bass and the treble to the middle position,
    while in bass or treble, push and hold the tone knob.
    The radio will produce one beep.

    To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
    speakers, push and release the tone knob until FAD
    appears on the display. Turn the knob to move the
    sound toward the front or the rear speakers.

    To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
    position, push and hold the tone knob when no tone or
    speaker control is displayed. ALL CENTERED will
    appear on the display and you will hear a beep.
    AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this button
    to select customized equalization settings designed
    for country/western, jazz, talk, pop, rock and classical.
    The equalization one through seven options are included
    only if your vehicle is equipped with the Bose® system.
    Press the AUTO EQ button to select equalization
    settings designed for equalization one through seven.

    To adjust the balance between
    the right and the left speakers, push and release
    this knob until BAL appears on the display. Turn the
    knob to move the sound toward the right or the
    left speakers.

    To adjust the balance and the fade to the middle
    position, push the tone knob, then push it again and
    hold it until you hear one beep.
    To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
    position, while in fade or balance, push and hold
    the tone knob when no tone or speaker control is
    displayed. ALL CENTERED will appear on the display
    and you will hear a beep.

    To return the bass and treble to the manual mode, push
    and release the tone knob until the BASS and TREB
    appears on the display.

    3-72

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 185

    Finding a Category (CAT) Station
    (XM™ Satellite Radio Service Only)

    If the radio cannot find the desired category,
    NOT FOUND will appear on the display and the radio
    will return to the last station you were listening to.

    To select and find a desired category perform the
    following:

    Radio Messages

    1. Press the CAT button to activate category select
    mode. The current category will appear on the
    display.
    2. Turn the tune knob to select a category.
    3. Once the desired category is displayed, press either
    SEEK arrow to take you to that category’s first
    station.
    4. To go to another station within that category and
    the category is displayed, press either SEEK
    arrow again. If CAT times out and is no longer on
    the display, go back to Step 1.

    CAL ERR (Calibration Error): The audio system has
    been calibrated for your vehicle from the factory.
    If CAL ERR appears on the display it means that the
    radio has not been configured properly for your vehicle
    and it must be returned to your dealer for service.
    LOC (Locked): This message is displayed when the
    THEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Take your vehicle
    to your dealer for service.
    If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
    corrected, contact your dealer.

    5. Press CAT to exit category select mode or wait for
    CAT to time out.

    3-73

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 186

    XM™ Radio Messages
    Radio Display
    Message

    Condition

    Action Required

    XL (Explicit Language
    Channels)

    XL on the radio display,
    after the channel name,
    indicates content with
    explicit language.

    These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a
    customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

    Updating

    Updating
    encryption code

    The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, and
    no action is required. This process should take no longer
    than 30 seconds.

    No Signl

    Loss of signal

    The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in a
    location that is blocking the XM™ signal. When the vehicle
    is moved into an open area, the signal should return.

    Loading

    Acquiring channel audio
    (after four second delay)

    The radio system is acquiring and processing audio and
    text data. No action is needed. This message should
    disappear shortly.

    Off Air

    Channel not in service

    This channel is not currently in service.
    Tune to another channel.

    CH Unavl

    Channel no longer
    available

    This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.
    Tune to another station. If this station was one of the
    presets, choose another station for that preset button.

    No Info

    Artist Name/Feature
    not available

    No artist information is available at this time on this
    channel. The system is working properly.

    No Info

    Song/Program Title
    not available

    No song title information is available at this time on this
    channel. The system is working properly.

    3-74

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 187

    XM™ Radio Messages (cont’d)
    Radio Display
    Message

    Condition

    Action Required

    No Info

    Category Name
    not available

    No category information is available at this time on this
    channel. The system is working properly.

    No Info

    No Text/Informational
    message available

    No text or informational messages are available at this
    time on this channel. The system is working properly.

    Not Found

    No channel available for
    the chosen category

    There are no channels available for the selected category.
    The system is working properly.

    XM Lock

    Theft lock active

    The XM™ receiver in your vehicle may have previously
    been in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™
    receivers cannot be swapped between vehicles. If this
    message is received after having your vehicle serviced,
    check with your dealer.

    Radio ID

    Radio ID label
    (channel 0)

    If tuned to channel 0, this message will alternate with the
    XM™ Radio eight digit radio ID label. This label is needed
    to activate the service.

    Unknown

    Radio ID not known
    (should only be if
    hardware failure)

    If this message is received when tuned to channel 0,
    there may be a receiver fault. Consult with your dealer.

    Check XM

    Hardware failure

    If this message does not clear within a short period of time,
    the receiver may have a fault. Consult with your dealer.

    3-75

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 188

    Playing a CD
    If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in the
    player, it will stay in the player. When the ignition
    or radio is turned on, the CD will start playing where it
    stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
    When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol will appear on
    the CD. As each new track starts to play, the track
    number will appear on the display.
    The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
    CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
    smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
    If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced
    due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
    of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
    CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
    in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
    loading and ejecting. If these problems occur try a
    known good CD.
    Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caught
    in the CD player.
    If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
    later in this section.

    LOAD: Press this button to load CDs into the CD
    player. This CD player will hold up to six CDs.
    To insert one CD, do the following:
    1. Turn the ignition on.
    2. Press and release the LOAD button.
    3. Wait for the indicator light, located to the right of the
    slot, to turn green.
    4. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,
    label side up. The player will pull the CD in.
    To insert multiple CDs, do the following:
    1. Turn the ignition on.
    2. Press and hold the LOAD button for two seconds.
    You will hear a beep and the indicator light, located
    to the right of the slot, will begin to flash and
    LOAD # will appear on the display.
    3. Once the light stops flashing and turns green,
    INSERT CD # will appear on the display, load
    a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot, label side
    up. The player will pull the CD in.
    Once the CD is loaded, the indicator light will begin
    flashing again. Once the light stops flashing and
    turns green, you can load another CD. The
    CD player takes up to six CDs. Do not try to load
    more than six.

    3-76

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 189

    To load more than one CD but less than six, complete
    Steps 1 through 3. When finished loading CDs,
    press the LOAD button to cancel the loading function.
    The radio will begin to play the last CD loaded.
    If more than one CD has been loaded, a number for
    each CD will appear on the display.

    Playing a Specific Loaded CD
    For every CD loaded, a number will appear on the
    display. To play a specific CD, first press the CD button,
    then press the numbered pushbutton that corresponds
    to the CD. A small bar will appear under the CD number
    that is playing and the track number will appear on
    the display.
    If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
    later in this section.

    Z (Eject):

    Press this button to eject CD(s).

    To eject the CD that is currently playing, press and
    release this button.
    To eject multiple CDs, do the following:
    1. Press and hold the CD eject button for five seconds.
    You will hear a beep and the indicator light, located
    to the right of the slot, will begin to flash and
    EJECT ALL will appear on the display.

    2. Once the light stops flashing and turns green,
    REMOVE CD # will appear on the display.
    The CD will eject and can be removed.
    Once the CD is removed, the indicator light will
    begin flashing again and another CD will eject.
    To stop ejecting the CDs, press the LOAD or the
    eject button.
    If the CD is not removed, after 25 seconds, the CD will
    be automatically pulled back into the player. If CD is
    pushed back into the player, before the 25 second time
    period is complete, the player will sense an error
    and will try to eject the CD several times before
    stopping.
    Do not repeatedly press the CD eject button to eject a
    CD after you have tried to push it in manually. The
    player’s 25-second eject timer will reset at each press of
    the eject button, causing the player to not eject the
    CD until the 25-second time period has elapsed.

    r (Reverse): Press this button to reverse
    within the track.
    [ (Fast Forward):

    Press this button to fast forward

    within the track.

    3-77

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 190

    N (Repeat): With repeat, one track or an entire CD
    can be repeated.
    To use repeat, do the following:

    • To repeat the track you are listening to, press and
    release the repeat button. RPT ON will appear on
    the display. Press this button again to turn off repeat
    play. RPT OFF will appear on the display.

    • To repeat the CD you are listening to, press and
    hold the repeat button for two seconds. RPT ON
    will appear on the display. Press this button again
    to turn off repeat play. RPT OFF will appear on
    the display.

    y (Random): With random, you can listen to the
    tracks in random, rather than sequential, order, on one
    CD or on all of the CDs. To use random, do one of
    the following:
    • To play the tracks on the CD you are listening to in
    random order, press and release the random
    button. RANDOM ONE will appear on the display.
    Press this button again to turn off random play.

    • To play the tracks on all of the CDs that are loaded
    in random order, press and hold this button for
    more than two seconds. You will hear a beep and
    RANDOM ALL will appear on the display. Press this
    button again to turn off random play.

    t SEEK u:

    Press the left arrow to go to the start of
    the current track, if more than ten seconds have
    played. Press the right arrow to go to the next track.
    If either arrow is held or pressed more than once,
    the player will continue moving backward or forward
    through the CD.
    To scan one CD, press and hold either arrow for more
    than two seconds until SCAN appears on the display
    and you hear a beep. The radio will go to the next track,
    play for 10 seconds, then go on to the next track.
    Press either arrow again, to stop scanning.
    To scan all loaded CDs, press and hold either arrow for
    more than four seconds until CD SCAN appears on
    the display and you hear a beep. Use this feature
    to listen to 10 seconds of the first track of each loaded
    CD. Press either arrow again, to stop scanning.
    DISP (Display): Press this knob to see how long the
    current track has been playing. The elapsed time of the
    track will appear on the display. To change the
    default on the display, track or elapsed time, press this
    knob until you see the display you want, then hold
    the knob for two seconds. The radio will produce one
    beep and the selected display will now be the default.
    BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when
    a CD is playing. The inactive CD(s) will remain safely
    inside the radio for future listening.

    3-78

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 191

    B (CD):

    Press this button to play a CD when listening
    to the radio. The CD symbol will appear on the display
    when a CD is loaded.

    3. Select the desired CD by pressing the numbered
    pushbutton and then use the SEEK SCAN right
    arrow to locate the track to be saved. the track will
    begin to play.

    AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press EQ to
    select an equalization setting while playing a CD.
    The equalization will be set whenever a CD is played.
    See “EQ” listed previously for more information.
    If you select an EQ setting for your CD, it will be
    activated each time you play a CD.

    4. Press and hold the song list button to save the
    track into memory. When the song list button is
    pressed, one beep will be heard immediately. After
    two seconds of continuously pressing the song
    list button, two beeps will sound to confirm the track
    has been saved.

    Using Song List Mode

    5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for saving other selections.

    R (Song List):

    S-LIST FULL will appear on the display if you try to save
    more than 20 selections.

    To save tracks into the song list feature, perform the
    following steps:

    To play the song list, press the song list button.
    One beep will be heard and S-LIST will appear on the
    display. The recorded tracks will begin to play in
    the order they were saved.

    The six-disc CD changer has a
    feature called song list. This feature is capable of saving
    20 track selections.

    1. Turn the CD player on and load it with at least one
    CD. See “LOAD CD” listed previously in this section
    for more information.

    Seek through the song list by using the SEEK SCAN
    arrows. Seeking past the last saved track will return to
    the first saved track.

    2. Check to see that the CD changer is not in song
    list mode. S-LIST should not appear on the
    display. If S-LIST is present, press the song list
    button to turn it off.

    3-79

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 192

    To delete tracks from the song list, perform the following
    steps:
    1. Turn the CD player on.
    2. Press the song list button to turn song list on.
    S-LIST will appear on the display.
    3. Press either SEEK SCAN arrow to select the
    desired track to be deleted.
    4. Press and hold the song list button for two seconds.
    When the song list button is pressed, one beep will
    be heard immediately. After two seconds of
    continuously pressing the song list button,
    two beeps will be heard to confirm that the track
    has been deleted.
    After a track has been deleted, the remaining tracks are
    moved up the list. When another track is added to the
    song list, the track will be added to the end of the list.
    To delete the entire song list, perform the following steps:

    3. Press and hold the song list button for more than
    four seconds. One beep will be heard, followed by
    two beeps after two seconds, and a final beep
    will be heard after four seconds. S-LIST EMPTY will
    appear on the display indicating the song list has
    been deleted.
    If a CD is ejected, and the song list contains saved
    tracks from that CD, those tracks are automatically
    deleted from the song list. Any tracks saved to the song
    list again are added to the bottom of the list.
    To end song list mode, press the song list button.
    One beep will be heard and S-LIST will be removed
    from the display.

    CD Messages
    CHECK CD: If this message appears on the display
    and/or the CD comes out, it could be for one of the
    following reasons:

    1. Turn the CD player on.

    • It is very hot. When the temperature returns to

    2. Press the song list button to turn song list on.
    S-LIST will appear on the display.

    • You are driving on a very rough road. When the

    normal, the CD should play.
    road becomes smoother, the CD should play.

    • The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
    • The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
    try again.

    3-80

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 193

    • There may have been a problem while burning

    Rear Seat Entertainment System

    the CD.

    • The label may be caught in the CD player.
    If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
    try a known good CD.
    If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
    corrected, contact your dealer. If the radio displays
    an error message, write it down and provide it to your
    dealer when reporting the problem.

    Navigation/Radio System
    Your vehicle may have a navigation radio system that
    includes Radio Data System (RDS) with Program
    Type (PTY) selections that will seek out the kind of
    music you want to listen to and XM™ Satellite Radio
    Service capabilities (if equipped). The radio can
    also communicate with the navigation system to
    broadcast announcements on traffic, weather, and
    emergency alert communications. For information on
    how to use this system, see the “Navigation System”
    manual.

    Your vehicle may have a DVD Rear Seat Entertainment
    (RSE) system. The RSE system includes a DVD
    player, a video display screen, two sets of wireless
    headphones, and a remote control.

    Parental Control
    This button is located behind the video screen. Press
    this button while a DVD or CD is playing to freeze
    the video and mute the audio. The video screen will
    display Parental Control ON and the power indicator
    light on the DVD player will flash. It will also disable all
    other button operations from the remote control and
    the DVD player, with the exception of the eject button.
    Press this button again to restore operation of the
    DVD player.
    This button may also be used to turn the DVD player
    power on and automatically resume play if the ignition
    is in RUN, ACCESSORY, or if RAP is active.

    Before You Drive
    The RSE system is for rear seat passengers only.
    The driver cannot safely view the video screen while
    driving and should not try to do so.

    3-81

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 194

    Headphones

    Battery Replacement

    The RSE system includes two sets of wireless
    headphones.

    To change the batteries, do the following:

    Each set of headphones has an ON/OFF control.
    An indicator light will illuminate on the headphones
    when they are on. If the light does not illuminate, the
    batteries may need to be replaced. See “Battery
    Replacement” following for more information.
    Each set of headphones has a volume knob.
    To adjust the volume, adjust this knob.
    The transmitters are located below the video display
    screen. The headphones will shut off automatically
    if they lose the signal from the system after about four
    minutes to save battery power. The signal may be lost if
    the system is turned off or if the headphones are out
    of range of the transmitters.
    When using the wired headphones, if the front seat
    passengers play a CD in the Radio with Six-Disc CD
    (if equipped) or use XM™ Satellite Radio Service
    (if equipped), you will hear the audio for these sources,
    instead of the DVD or CD that is currently playing
    through the RSE.
    Notice: Do not store the headphones in heat or
    direct sunlight. This could damage the headphones
    and repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
    Keep the headphones stored in a cool, dry place.

    1. Loosen the screw on the battery compartment door
    located on the left side of the headphone earpiece.
    2. Replace the two AAA batteries in the compartment.
    Make sure that they are installed correctly, using
    the diagram on the inside of the battery
    compartment.
    3. Tighten the screw to close the compartment door.
    If the headphones are to be stored for a long period
    of time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool,
    dry place.

    Stereo RCA Jacks
    The RCA jacks are located behind the video screen.
    The RCA jacks allow audio and video signals to
    be connected from an auxiliary device such as a
    camcorder or a video game unit to the RSE system.
    Standard RCA cables, not included, are needed
    to connect the auxiliary device to the RCA jacks.
    The yellow connector inputs video and the red and white
    connectors input right and left audio. Refer to the
    manufacturer’s instructions for proper connection of the
    auxiliary device.

    3-82

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 195

    To use the auxiliary inputs on the RSE system, connect
    an external auxiliary device to the color-coded RCA
    jacks and turn both the auxiliary device and the
    RSE system power on. If the RSE system had been
    previously in the DVD player mode, pressing the SRCE
    button on the faceplate or the remote control will
    switch the RSE system between the auxiliary device
    and the DVD player.

    How to Change the Video Format when in
    the Auxiliary Mode
    The auxiliary input video format is preset to NTSC.
    In some countries, the video format may be in the PAL
    system. To change the video format, perform the
    following:
    1. Press the display menu button.
    2. Press the down arrow button to highlight the Video
    Format option.
    3. Press the enter button to select Video Format.
    4. Press the right or left arrow button to select
    the desired video format.
    5. Press the enter button to accept the change.

    Audio Output
    Audio from the DVD player or auxiliary inputs may be
    heard through the following possible sources:

    • Wireless Headphones
    • Vehicle Speakers
    • Vehicle wired headphone jacks on the Rear Seat
    Audio system (if equipped)
    The RSE system will always transmit the audio signal by
    infrared to the wireless headphones, if there is audio
    available. See “Headphones” previously for more
    information.
    The RSE system is capable of outputting audio to the
    vehicle speakers by using the radio. The RSE system
    may be selected as an audio source on the radio if the
    RSE system power is on. Once the RSE system is
    selected as an audio source on the radio, adjust the
    speaker volume on the radio, if necessary. If the RSE
    system power is not on, the RSE system will not be an
    available source on the radio. Refer to the radio
    information for the radio that your vehicle has for more
    information.
    The RSE system is capable of outputting audio to the
    wired headphone jacks on the rear seat audio system
    (if equipped). The RSE system may be selected as an
    audio source on the rear seat audio system if the RSE
    system power is on. Refer to Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
    on page 3-92 for more information.
    3-83

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 196

    Video Screen
    The video screen is located in the overhead console.
    To use the video screen, push forward on the release
    latch and the screen will fold down. Adjust the screen’s
    position as desired. When the video screen is not in
    use, push it up into its latched position.
    The DVD player and display will continue to operate
    when the screen is in the up or the down position.
    The video screen contains the transmitters for the
    wireless headphones and the remote control. If the
    screen is in the closed position, the signals will not be
    available for the operation of the headphones or the
    remote control.
    Notice: Directly touching the video screen may
    damage it. Do not touch the screen. See “Cleaning
    the Video Screen” later in this section for more
    information.

    DVD Player
    The DVD player is located in the overhead console.
    The DVD player can be controlled by the buttons on the
    DVD player and/or by the buttons on the remote
    control. See “Remote Control” later in this section for
    more information.

    The DVD player power may be turned on when the
    ignition is in RUN, ACCESSORY, or when Retained
    Accessory Power (RAP) is active.
    The RSE system DVD player is only compatible with
    DVDs of the appropriate region code for the country that
    the vehicle was sold in. The DVD region code is
    printed on the jacket of most DVDs.
    Standard audio CDs, CD-R, CD-RW, Video CD and
    Photo CD/CD-R media are fully supported by this DVD
    player. DVD-R and DVD-RW media is supported if
    formatted as DVD-Video. DVD+R and DVD+RW media
    may or may not be supported by the DVD player.
    The DVD player does not support DVD-RAM,
    DVD-ROM, and DVD Audio media. An error message
    will appear on the display if this type of media is inserted
    into the DVD player.
    When using the wired headphones, not included, if the
    front seat passengers play a CD in the Radio with
    Six-Disc CD (if equipped) or use XM™ Satellite Radio
    Service (if equipped), you will hear the audio for
    these sources, instead of the DVD or CD that is currently
    playing through the RSE.
    If an error message appears on the video screen,
    see “DVD Messages” later in this section.

    3-84

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 197

    y (Main DVD Menu): Press this button to access the
    DVD menu. The DVD menu is different on every
    DVD. Use the up, down, left, and right arrow buttons to
    move the cursor around the DVD menu. After making
    a selection press the enter button. This button only
    operates when playing a DVD.
    z (Set-up Menu):

    DVD Player Buttons

    O(Power):

    Press this button to turn the RSE system
    on and off. The power indicator light will illuminate
    when the power is on.

    X (Eject):

    Press this button to eject a DVD or CD.

    SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch between
    the DVD player and an auxiliary source.

    c(Stop):

    Press this button to stop playing, rewinding,
    or fast forwarding a DVD or CD. Press this button
    twice to return to the beginning of the DVD.

    s (Play/Pause): Press this button to start play of a
    DVD or CD. Press this button while a DVD or CD is
    playing to pause it. Press this button again to continue
    the play of the DVD or CD.

    Press this button to adjust the
    color, tint, brightness, contrast, display mode, and
    dynamic range compression. The dynamic range
    compression feature can be used to reduce loud audio
    and increase low audio produced by some DVDs.
    To change a feature back to the factory default setting,
    press this button to display the feature, then press
    and hold this button. The default setting will appear on
    the display.
    While playing an Audio or DVD disc, press and hold this
    button to display and to remove the track and time
    information.

    n, q, p, o (Menu Navigation Arrows): Use the
    arrow buttons to navigate through a menu.
    r (Enter): Press this button to select the choices
    that are highlighted in any menu.

    3-85

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 198

    Playing a Disc

    Ejecting a Disc

    To play a disc, gently insert the disc with the label side
    up into the loading slot. The DVD player will continue
    loading the disc and the player will automatically start,
    if the vehicle is in RUN, ACCESSORY, or when
    RAP is active.

    Press the eject button on the DVD player faceplate to
    eject the disc. There is not an eject button on the remote
    control.

    If a disc is already in the player, press the play/pause
    button on the DVD player faceplate or on the remote
    control.
    Some DVDs will not allow fast forwarding or skipping of
    the copyright information or the previews. Some
    DVDs will begin playing after the previews have finished.
    If the DVD does not begin to play the main title, refer
    to the on-screen instructions.

    Stopping and Resuming Playback
    To stop playing a disc, press and release the stop
    button on the DVD player faceplate or the remote
    control.
    To resume playback, press the play/pause button on
    the DVD player faceplate or the remote control.
    The movie should resume play from where it was last
    stopped, if the disc has not been ejected and the
    stop button has not been pressed twice. If the disc has
    been ejected or if the stop button has been pressed
    twice, the disc will resume play at the beginning.

    If a disc is ejected from the player, but is not removed,
    the DVD player will reload the disc after a short
    period of time. The disc will be stored in the DVD player.
    The DVD player will not resume play of the disc
    automatically.

    Remote Control
    To use the remote control, aim it at the transmitter
    window below the video screen and press the desired
    button. Direct sunlight or very bright light may affect the
    ability of the RSE system to receive signals from the
    remote control. If the remote control does not seem to
    be working, the batteries may need to be replaced.
    See “Battery Replacement” later in this section.
    Objects blocking the line of sight may also affect the
    function of the remote control.
    Notice: Storing the remote control in a hot area or
    in direct sunlight may damage it, and the repairs
    would not be covered by your warranty. Keep
    the remote control stored in a cool, dry place.
    To extend the life of the batteries, the remote control
    does not have a press and hold feature.

    3-86

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 199

    Remote Control Buttons

    z (Set-up Menu):

    Press this button to adjust the
    color, tint, brightness, contrast, display mode, and
    dynamic range compression. The dynamic range
    compression feature can be used to reduce loud audio
    and increase low audio produced by some DVDs.

    e (Audio):

    Press this button to display a menu that
    will only appear when a DVD is being played. The format
    and content of this function will vary for each disc.

    r (Fast Reverse): Press this button to fast reverse
    the DVD or CD. To stop fast reversing, press this button
    again. This button may not work when the DVD is
    playing the copyright information or the previews.
    SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch between
    the DVD player and an auxiliary source.

    O (Power): Press this button to turn the DVD player
    on and off.
    v (Title):

    Press this button to return the DVD to the
    main menu of the DVD.

    n, q, p, o (Menu Navigation Arrows): Use the
    arrow buttons to navigate through a menu.

    c (Stop): Press this button to stop playing, rewinding,
    or fast forwarding a DVD or CD. Press this button
    twice to return to the beginning of the DVD.
    t (Previous Track/Chapter):

    Press this button to
    return to the start of the current track or chapter.
    Press this button again to return to the previous track or
    chapter. This button may not work when the DVD is
    playing the copyright information or the previews.

    3-87

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 200

    1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad): The numeric keypad
    provides you with the capability of direct chapter,
    title, and track number selection.

    }10 (Double Digit Entries):

    Press this button to
    select chapter, title, and track numbers greater than 9.
    Press this button before inputting the number.

    \ (Clear):

    Press this button within three seconds after
    inputting a number to clear the number(s).

    P (Illumination):

    Press this button to turn the remote
    control backlight on. The backlight will time out after
    about 7 to 10 seconds if no other button is pressed while
    the backlight is on.

    y (Main DVD Menu):

    Press this button to access the
    DVD menu. The DVD menu is different on every
    DVD. Use the up, down, left, and right arrow buttons to
    move the cursor around the DVD menu. After making
    a selection press the enter button. This button only
    operates when playing a DVD.

    r (Enter): Press this button to select the choices
    that are highlighted in any menu.

    q (Return):

    Press this button to exit the current
    active menu and return to the previous menu. This
    button will operate only when a DVD is playing and a
    menu is active.

    | (Camera Angle):

    Press this button to change
    camera angles on DVDs that have this feature when a
    DVD is playing. The format and content of this
    function will vary for each disc.

    { (Subtitle):

    Press this button to turn on subtitles and
    to move through subtitle options when a DVD is
    playing. The format and content of this function will vary
    for each disc.

    [ (Fast Forward):

    Press this button to fast forward
    the DVD or CD. To stop fast forwarding, press this
    button again. This button may not work when the DVD
    is playing the copyright information or the previews.

    s (Play/Pause):

    Press this button to start play of a
    DVD or CD. Press this button while a DVD or CD is
    playing to pause it. Press this button again to continue
    the play of the DVD or CD.

    3-88

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 201

    When the DVD is playing, press the pause button then
    press the fast forward button. The DVD will continue
    playing in a slow play mode. To cancel slow play mode,
    press the play/pause button.

    u (Next Track/Chapter):

    Press this button to advance
    to the beginning of the next track or chapter. This
    button may not work when the DVD is playing the
    copyright information or the previews.

    Battery Replacement
    To change the batteries, do the following:
    1. Remove the battery compartment door located on
    the bottom of the remote control.
    2. Replace the two AA batteries in the compartment.
    Make sure that they are installed correctly, using
    the diagram on the inside of the battery
    compartment.
    3. Close the battery door securely.
    If the remote control is to be stored for a long period of
    time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool,
    dry place.

    Problem
    No power.

    Recommended Action
    The ignition might not be
    in on or accessory.
    The parental control
    button might have been
    turned on. The power
    indicator light will flash.
    Disc will not play.
    The system might be off.
    The parental control
    button might have been
    turned on. The power
    indicator light will flash.
    The system might be in
    auxiliary mode.
    The disc is upside down
    or is not compatible.
    The picture does not fill the Check the display mode
    screen. There are black
    settings in the display
    borders on the top and
    menu.
    bottom or on both sides or
    it looks stretched out.
    The disc was ejected, but The disc is being stored in
    it was pulled back into the the DVD player. Press the
    DVD player.
    eject button again to eject
    the disc.

    3-89

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 202

    Problem
    In auxiliary mode, the
    picture moves or scrolls.

    Recommended Action
    Check the auxiliary input
    connections at both
    devices.
    Change the Video Format
    to PAL or NTSC. See
    “Stereo RCA Jacks”
    previously for how to
    change the video format.
    The language in the audio Check the audio or
    or on the screen is wrong. language selection in the
    main DVD menu.
    The remote control does
    Check to make sure there
    not work.
    is no obstruction between
    the remote control and the
    transmitter window.
    Check the batteries to
    make sure they are not
    dead or installed
    incorrectly.
    The parental control
    button might have been
    turned on. The power
    indicator light will flash.

    Problem
    After stopping the player, I
    push Play but sometimes
    the DVD starts where I
    left off and sometimes at
    the beginning.

    The auxiliary source is
    running but there is no
    picture or sound.

    My disc is stuck in the
    player. The Load/Eject
    button does not work.

    Recommended Action
    If the stop button was
    pressed one time, the
    DVD player will resume
    playing where the DVD
    was stopped. If the stop
    button was pressed two
    times the DVD player will
    begin to play from the
    beginning of the DVD.
    Check that the DVD
    player is in the auxiliary
    source mode.
    Check the auxiliary input
    connections at both
    devices.
    Turn the DVD power off,
    then on, then press the
    load/eject button on the
    DVD player.
    Do not attempt to forcibly
    remove the disc from the
    DVD player. This could
    permanently damage the
    disc and DVD player.

    3-90

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 203

    Problem
    Recommended Action
    Sometimes the wireless
    Check for obstructions,
    headphone audio cuts out low batteries, reception
    or buzzes.
    range, and interference
    from cellular telephone
    towers or by using your
    cellular telephone in the
    vehicle.
    Check that the
    headphones are facing
    the front of the vehicle.
    I lost the remote and/or
    See your dealer for
    the headphones.
    assistance.
    The DVD is playing, but
    Check that the DVD
    there is no picture or
    player is in DVD mode.
    sound.
    The audio/video skips or
    The DVD or CD could be
    jumps.
    dirty, scratched, or
    damaged.
    The audio from the radio The RSE is working
    for the Radio with
    correctly.
    Six-Disc CD and XM™
    Use the wireless
    has taken over the audio headphones or have the
    from the DVD or CD when front seat passengers
    using the wired
    listen to another audio
    headphones.
    source.

    DVD Messages
    The following errors may be displayed on the video
    screen:
    Disc Format Error: This message will be displayed if a
    disc is inserted upside down, if the disc is not readable,
    or if the format is not compatible with the DVD player.
    Load/Eject Error: This message will be displayed if the
    disc is not properly loaded or ejected.
    Disc Play Error: This message will be displayed if the
    DVD player cannot play the disc. Scratched or
    damaged discs will cause this error.
    Region Code Error: This message will be displayed if
    the region code of the DVD is not compatible with
    the region code of the DVD player.
    No Disc: This message will be displayed if any of the
    buttons on the DVD faceplate or remote control are
    pressed and no disc is present in the DVD player.

    3-91

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 204

    DVD Distortion

    Rear seat passengers always have control of the
    volume for each set of headphones.

    There may be an experience with audio distortion in the
    wireless headphones when operating cellular phones,
    scanners, CB radios, Global Positioning Systems
    (GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile fax, or walkie talkies.

    The RSA will run when the radio is off if the ignition key
    is positioned in the power mode, see Ignition Positions
    on page 2-20 in this manual.

    It may be necessary to turn off the DVD player
    when operating one of these devices in or near the
    vehicle.
    * Excludes the OnStar® System.

    Cleaning the Video Screen
    Pour some isopropyl or rubbing alcohol on a clean cloth
    and gently wipe the video screen. Do not spray
    directly onto the screen and do not press too hard or
    too long on the video screen.

    Rear Seat Audio (RSA)

    P (Power):

    This feature allows rear seat passengers to select and
    listen to any of the available radio sources: AM/FM,
    XM, CD, or DVD. However, a rear seat passenger
    cannot control a source selected on the radio by
    someone in the front of the vehicle. For example, the
    RSA cannot be used to change CD tracks if the radio is
    set to CD. Also, if the radio is switched to a source
    the RSA has control of, sound will not be lost, but the
    RSA will lose control of that sourse.

    u (Volume): The left-hand knob controls the
    headphone outlet on the left and the right-hand knob
    controls the headphone outlet on the right. Turn
    either knob clockwise to increase the volume and
    counterclockwise to decrease the volume.

    Press this button to turn the RSA on or
    off. The rear speakers are muted when the power
    is turned on.

    3-92

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 205

    SRCE (Source): Press this button to select an audio
    source: AM/FM, XM, CD, or DVD. The inactive CD,
    or DVD will remain safely inside the radio for future
    listening. There are sources that are internal to the radio,
    such as AM/FM, and CD and other sources to radio
    that are external, such as XM™, DVD, and OnStar®. If
    an external source has been selected, the rear seat
    passengers cannot select a different external source.

    When a CD is playing, press the SEEK button to go to
    the next track on the CD. This function is inactive if
    the front seat passengers are listening to a CD.

    SEEK: Press this button to go to the next station or CD
    track and stay there. The display will show the
    selection. This function is inactive if the radio is set to
    the same source.

    Theft-Deterrent Feature

    To scan preset radio stations, press and hold the SEEK
    button for two seconds and the radio will go to the
    next preset station. Hold this button down and the radio
    will continue to go through all available preset stations.
    This function is inactive if the front seat passengers
    are listening to the radio.

    When a CD is playing in the six-disc CD player, press and
    hold the SEEK button for two seconds to go you to the
    next CD, if multiple CDs are loaded. This function is
    inactive if the front seat passengers are listening to a CD.

    THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of your
    vehicle’s radio. The feature works automatically by
    learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number
    (VIN). If the radio is moved to a different vehicle, it
    will not operate and LOCKED will appear on the display.
    When the radio and vehicle are turned off, the blinking
    red light indicates that THEFTLOCK® is armed.
    With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio will not operate
    if stolen.

    3-93

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 206

    Audio Steering Wheel Controls

    g (OnStar/Mute): If your vehicle has OnStar®, press
    this button to interact with the OnStar® system. See
    the OnStar® manual provided with your vehicle for more
    information.
    If your vehicle does not have OnStar®, press this button
    to mute the system. Press it again, or any other radio
    button, to turn on the sound.
    NXT (Next): Press this button to play a station you
    have programmed on the radio preset pushbuttons.
    The radio will only seek preset stations with a strong
    signal that are in the selected band.

    Some audio controls can be adjusted at the steering
    wheel. They include the following:

    When a CD is playing in the CD changer, press this
    button to go to the next available CD, if multiple CDs
    are loaded.

    Press the forward or the back arrow to
    go to the next or to the previous radio station and
    stay there. The radio will only seek stations with a strong
    signal that are in the selected band.

    + SRC − (Source): Press plus (+) or the minus (−)
    button to switch between FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1
    or XM2 (if equipped), or a CD. If a CD is loaded
    the CD symbol will appear on the display.

    When a CD is playing, press the forward or the back
    arrow to fast forward or reverse.

    + VOL − (Volume): Press the plus (+) or the minus (−)
    button to increase or to decrease the volume.

    u SEEK t:

    3-94

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 207

    Radio Reception

    Care of Your CDs and DVDs

    AM

    Handle discs carefully. Store them in their original cases
    or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight
    and dust. If the surface of a disc is soiled, dampen
    a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution
    and clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.

    The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
    especially at night. The longer range can cause
    station frequencies to interfere with each other. Static
    can occur on AM stations caused by things like
    storms and power lines. Try reducing the treble to
    reduce this noise.

    FM Stereo
    FM stereo will give the best sound, but FM signals
    will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).
    Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals,
    causing the sound to fade in and out.

    Be sure never to touch the side without writing when
    handling discs. Pick up discs by grasping the outer
    edges or the edge of the hole and the outer edge.

    Care of the CD and DVD Player
    The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised,
    due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics
    with lubricants internal to the CD mechanism.

    XM™ Satellite Radio Service
    XM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio
    reception from coast to coast. Just as with FM, tall
    buildings or hills can interfere with satellite radio signals,
    causing the sound to fade in and out. The radio may
    display NO SIGNAL to indicate interference.

    3-95

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 208

    Fixed Mast Antenna
    The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car
    washes without being damaged. If the mast should
    ever become slightly bent, straighten it out by hand.
    If the mast is badly bent, replace it.
    Check occasionally to make sure the mast is still
    tightened to the antenna base located on the hood of
    the vehicle. If tightening is required, tighten by hand.

    XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
    System
    The XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof
    of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear of snow and
    ice build up for clear radio reception.
    The performance of the XM™ system may be affected if
    the sunroof is open.
    Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle can interfere
    with the performance of the XM™ system. Make sure
    that the XM™ satellite antenna is not obstructed.

    3-96

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 209

    Section 4

    Driving Your Vehicle

    Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ..........4-2
    Defensive Driving ...........................................4-2
    Drunken Driving .............................................4-2
    Control of a Vehicle ........................................4-5
    Braking .........................................................4-5
    Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .........................4-6
    Braking in Emergencies ...................................4-8
    Limited-Slip Rear Axle .....................................4-8
    All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System .........................4-8
    Steering ........................................................4-9
    Off-Road Recovery .......................................4-11
    Passing .......................................................4-11
    Loss of Control .............................................4-12
    Off-Road Driving ...........................................4-13
    Driving at Night ............................................4-14
    Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ..................4-15

    City Driving ..................................................4-18
    Freeway Driving ...........................................4-19
    Before Leaving on a Long Trip .......................4-20
    Highway Hypnosis ........................................4-21
    Hill and Mountain Roads ................................4-22
    Winter Driving ..............................................4-24
    If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud,
    Ice or Snow ..............................................4-28
    Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out .................4-28
    Loading Your Vehicle ....................................4-29
    Towing ..........................................................4-34
    Towing Your Vehicle .....................................4-34
    Recreational Vehicle Towing ...........................4-34
    Electronically Controlled Air Suspension
    System ....................................................4-34
    Towing a Trailer ...........................................4-35

    4-1

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 210

    Your Driving, the Road,
    and Your Vehicle
    Defensive Driving

    reading, or reaching for something on the floor — makes
    proper defensive driving more difficult and can even
    cause a collision, with resulting injury. Ask a passenger to
    help do things like this, or pull off the road in a safe place
    to do them yourself. These simple defensive driving
    techniques could save your life.

    The best advice anyone can give about driving is:
    Drive defensively.

    Drunken Driving

    Please start with a very important safety device in your
    vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They Are for
    Everyone on page 1-7.
    Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.”
    On city streets, rural roads, or freeways, it means
    “always expect the unexpected.”
    Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to
    be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what
    they might do. Be ready for their mistakes.
    Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable of
    accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough following
    distance. It is the best defensive driving maneuver, in
    both city and rural driving. You never know when the
    vehicle in front of you is going to brake or turn suddenly.
    Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate on
    the driving task. Anything that distracts from the driving
    task — such as concentrating on a cellular telephone call,

    Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
    a national tragedy. It is the number one contributor
    to the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims
    every year.
    Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive
    a vehicle:






    Judgment
    Muscular Coordination
    Vision
    Attentiveness

    Police records show that almost half of all motor
    vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
    these deaths are the result of someone who was
    drinking and driving. In recent years, more than
    16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been
    associated with the use of alcohol, with more than
    300,000 people injured.

    4-2

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 211

    Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half the adult
    population — choose never to drink alcohol, so they
    never drive after drinking. For persons under 21,
    it is against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.
    There are good medical, psychological and
    developmental reasons for these laws.

    same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce (120 ml) glasses
    of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces
    (45 ml) of liquors like whiskey, gin, or vodka.

    The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
    safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and
    then drive. But what if people do? How much is
    “too much” if someone plans to drive? It is a lot less
    than many might think. Although it depends on
    each person and situation, here is some general
    information on the problem.
    The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone
    who is drinking depends upon four things:

    • The amount of alcohol consumed
    • The drinker’s body weight
    • The amount of food that is consumed before and
    during drinking

    • The length of time it has taken the drinker to
    consume the alcohol
    According to the American Medical Association,
    a 180 lb (82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce
    (355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a
    BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the

    It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example,
    if the same person drank three double martinis
    (3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour,
    the person’s BAC would be close to 0.12 percent.
    A person who consumes food just before or during
    drinking will have a somewhat lower BAC level.

    4-3

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 212

    There is a gender difference, too. Women generally
    have a lower relative percentage of body water
    than men. Since alcohol is carried in body water, this
    means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC
    level than a man of her same body weight will when
    each has the same number of drinks.
    The law in most U.S. states, and throughout Canada,
    sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent. In some other
    countries, the limit is even lower. For example, it is
    0.05 percent in both France and Germany. The
    BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United States
    is 0.04 percent.
    The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to
    six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we have seen,
    it depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks,
    and how quickly the person drinks them.
    But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of
    0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills
    of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching
    0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night.
    All drivers are impaired at BAC levels above
    0.05 percent.

    Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision
    increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of
    0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of
    0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a
    collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance
    of this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at a
    level of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!
    The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol
    in one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold
    showers will speed that up. “I will be careful” is not the
    right answer. What if there is an emergency, a need to
    take sudden action, as when a child darts into the street?
    A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able to
    react quickly enough to avoid the collision.
    There is something else about drinking and driving that
    many people do not know. Medical research shows
    that alcohol in a person’s system can make crash
    injuries worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal
    cord, or heart. This means that when anyone who has
    been drinking — driver or passenger — is in a crash,
    that person’s chance of being killed or permanently
    disabled is higher than if the person had not been
    drinking.

    4-4

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 213

    Braking

    {CAUTION:
    Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
    Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and
    judgment can be affected by even a small
    amount of alcohol. You can have a serious — or
    even fatal — collision if you drive after drinking.
    Please do not drink and drive or ride with a
    driver who has been drinking. Ride home in a
    cab; or if you are with a group, designate a
    driver who will not drink.

    Control of a Vehicle
    You have three systems that make your vehicle go
    where you want it to go. They are the brakes, the
    steering, and the accelerator. All three systems have to
    do their work at the places where the tires meet the road.
    Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow or ice,
    it is easy to ask more of those control systems than the
    tires and road can provide. That means you can
    lose control of your vehicle.

    Braking action involves perception time and
    reaction time.
    First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.
    That is perception time. Then you have to bring up your
    foot and do it. That is reaction time.
    Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a
    second. But that is only an average. It might be less
    with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or
    more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,
    coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,
    drugs, and frustration. But even in three-fourths of a
    second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels
    66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an
    emergency, so keeping enough space between
    your vehicle and others is important.
    And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
    with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement
    or gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is
    wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; the condition of your brakes;
    the weight of the vehicle; and the amount of brake
    force applied.

    4-5

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 214

    Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in
    spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
    braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is
    a mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool
    between hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much
    faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace
    with the traffic and allow realistic following distances,
    you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking.
    That means better braking and longer brake life.
    If your engine ever stops while you are driving, brake
    normally but do not pump your brakes. If you do,
    the pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine
    stops, you will still have some power brake assist.
    But you will use it when you brake. Once the power
    assist is used up, it may take longer to stop and
    the brake pedal will be harder to push.

    Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
    Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes. ABS is an advanced
    electronic braking system that will help prevent a
    braking skid.
    When you start your engine and begin to drive away,
    your anti-lock brake system will check itself. You
    may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while
    this test is going on. This is normal.
    If there is a problem with
    the anti-lock brake system,
    this warning light will
    stay on. See Anti-Lock
    Brake System Warning
    Light on page 3-34.

    Along with ABS, your vehicle has a Dynamic Rear
    Proportioning (DRP) system. If there is a DRP problem,
    both the brake and ABS warning lights will come on
    accompanied by a 10-second chime. The lights and
    chime will come on each time the ignition is turned on
    until the problem is repaired. See your dealer for service.

    4-6

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 215

    The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure
    faster than any driver could. The computer is
    programmed to make the most of available tire and road
    conditions. This can help you steer around the obstacle
    while braking hard.

    Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
    Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
    on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
    happens with ABS:
    A computer senses that wheels are slowing down.
    If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
    will separately work the brakes at each front wheel
    and at both rear wheels.

    As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates on
    wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly.

    4-7

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 216

    Remember: Anti-lock does not change the time you
    need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always
    decrease stopping distance. If you get too close to
    the vehicle in front of you, you will not have time to apply
    your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops.
    Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even
    though you have anti-lock brakes.

    Using Anti-Lock
    Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
    down firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may feel
    the brakes vibrate, or you may notice some noise,
    but this is normal.

    Braking in Emergencies
    With anti-lock brakes, you can steer and brake at the
    same time. In many emergencies, steering can help you
    more than even the very best braking.

    Limited-Slip Rear Axle
    Your limited-slip rear axle can give you additional
    traction on snow, mud, ice, sand or gravel. It works
    like a standard axle most of the time, but when one of
    the rear wheels has no traction and the other does,
    this feature will allow the wheel with traction to move
    the vehicle.

    All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System
    Your vehicle has this feature. There is no lever or
    switch to engage or disengage the front axle. It is fully
    automatic and adjusts as needed for road conditions.
    Your vehicle has an active transfer case allowing
    two-wheel-drive operation on dry roads. The transfer
    case will shift automatically into all-wheel drive on
    slippery surfaces. You may feel an extra shift when the
    all-wheel drive engages.

    4-8

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 217

    Steering
    Power Steering
    If you lose power steering assist because the engine
    stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but
    it will take much more effort.

    Steering Tips
    Driving on Curves
    It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
    A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on
    the news happen on curves. Here is why:
    Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to
    the same laws of physics when driving on curves.
    The traction of the tires against the road surface makes
    it possible for the vehicle to change its path when
    you turn the front wheels. If there is no traction, inertia
    will keep the vehicle going in the same direction.
    If you have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice,
    you will understand this.

    Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.
    Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control
    systems — steering and acceleration — have to do
    their work where the tires meet the road. Adding
    the sudden acceleration can demand too much of
    those places. You can lose control.
    What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on
    the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you
    want it to go, and slow down.
    Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
    adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds
    are based on good weather and road conditions.
    Under less favorable conditions you will want to
    go slower.
    If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a
    curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front
    wheels are straight ahead.
    Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the
    curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
    accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
    accelerate gently into the straightaway.

    The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
    condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle
    at which the curve is banked, and your speed. While you
    are in a curve, speed is the one factor you can control.

    4-9

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 218

    Steering in Emergencies
    There are times when steering can be more effective
    than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find
    a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls
    out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between
    parked cars and stops right in front of you. You
    can avoid these problems by braking — if you can stop
    in time. But sometimes you cannot; there is not room.
    That is the time for evasive action — steering around
    the problem.
    Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
    these. First apply your brakes.
    See Braking on page 4-5. It is better to remove as much
    speed as you can from a possible collision. Then steer
    around the problem, to the left or right depending on the
    space available.

    An emergency like this requires close attention and a
    quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
    the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you can turn
    it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing either
    hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and just as
    quickly straighten the wheel once you have avoided
    the object.
    The fact that such emergency situations are always
    possible is a good reason to practice defensive
    driving at all times and wear safety belts properly.

    4-10

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 219

    Off-Road Recovery

    Passing

    You may find that your right wheels have dropped
    off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while you
    are driving.

    The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
    two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,
    accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then
    goes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?
    Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane
    highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the
    passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming
    traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in
    judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger can
    suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the
    worst of all traffic accidents — the head-on collision.
    So here are some tips for passing:

    • Drive ahead. Look down the road, to the sides
    and to crossroads for situations that might affect
    your passing patterns. If you have any doubt
    whatsoever about making a successful pass,
    wait for a better time.
    If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
    pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
    accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer
    so that your vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement.
    You can turn the steering wheel up to one-quarter turn
    until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge. Then
    turn your steering wheel to go straight down the roadway.

    • Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and
    lines. If you can see a sign up ahead that might
    indicate a turn or an intersection, delay your pass.
    A broken center line usually indicates it is all
    right to pass, providing the road ahead is clear.
    Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane or
    a double solid line, even if the road seems empty
    of approaching traffic.

    4-11

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 220

    • Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
    pass while you are awaiting an opportunity. For
    one thing, following too closely reduces your area
    of vision, especially if you are following a larger
    vehicle. Also, you will not have adequate space if
    the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops.
    Keep back a reasonable distance.

    • When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,
    start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and do
    not get too close. Time your move so you will be
    increasing speed as the time comes to move into the
    other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you will have a
    running start that more than makes up for the
    distance you would lose by dropping back. And if
    something happens to cause you to cancel your
    pass, you need only slow down and drop back again
    and wait for another opportunity.

    • If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow vehicle,
    wait your turn. But take care that someone is not
    trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow
    vehicle. Remember to glance over your shoulder
    and check the blind spot.

    • Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and
    start your left lane change signal before moving out
    of the right lane to pass.

    When you are far enough ahead of the passed
    vehicle to see its front in your inside mirror, activate
    your right lane change signal and move back into the
    right lane. Remember that your right outside mirror is
    convex. The vehicle you just passed may seem to be
    farther away from you than it really is.

    • Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on
    two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the next
    vehicle.

    • Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
    Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it may
    be slowing down or starting to turn.

    • If you are being passed, make it easy for the
    following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps you can
    ease a little to the right.

    Loss of Control
    Let us review what driving experts say about what
    happens when the three control systems — brakes,
    steering, and acceleration — do not have enough
    friction where the tires meet the road to do what the
    driver has asked.
    In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to
    steer and constantly seek an escape route or area
    of less danger.

    4-12

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 221

    Skidding
    In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
    Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
    care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving
    those conditions. But skids are always possible.
    The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
    three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels
    are not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much
    speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose
    cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much
    throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.

    While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try your
    best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, or braking,
    including engine braking by shifting to a lower gear. Any
    sudden changes could cause the tires to slide. You may
    not realize the surface is slippery until your vehicle is
    skidding. Learn to recognize warning clues — such as
    enough water, ice, or packed snow on the road to make
    a mirrored surface — and slow down when you have
    any doubt.
    Remember: Any anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps
    avoid only the braking skid.

    A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off
    the accelerator pedal.

    Off-Road Driving

    If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
    accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
    the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
    your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready
    for a second skid if it occurs.

    Your vehicle does not have features like added
    ground clearance, special underbody shielding,
    and a transfer case low gear range, things that are
    necessary for extended or severe off-road service.
    You should not drive off-road unless you are on a
    level, solid surface.

    Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
    gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, you
    will want to slow down and adjust your driving to these
    conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
    surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
    vehicle control more limited.

    4-13

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 222

    Driving at Night

    Here are some tips on night driving.

    • Drive defensively.
    • Do not drink and drive.
    • Since you cannot see as well, you may need to
    slow down and keep more space between you
    and other vehicles.

    • Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your
    headlamps can light up only so much road ahead.

    • In remote areas, watch for animals.
    • If you are tired, pull off the road in a safe place
    and rest.
    No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.
    But as we get older these differences increase.
    A 50-year-old driver may require at least twice as much
    light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
    Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.
    One reason is that some drivers are likely to be
    impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with night vision
    problems, or by fatigue.

    What you do in the daytime can also affect your night
    vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright
    sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your eyes will
    have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you are driving,
    do not wear sunglasses at night. They may cut down on
    glare from headlamps, but they also make a lot of things
    invisible.

    4-14

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 223

    You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
    headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even several
    seconds, for your eyes to re-adjust to the dark. When you
    are faced with severe glare, as from a driver who does
    not lower the high beams, or a vehicle with misaimed
    headlamps, slow down a little. Avoid staring directly into
    the approaching headlamps.

    Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads

    Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle
    clean — inside and out. Glare at night is made much
    worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass
    can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes
    lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,
    making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
    Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a
    roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your eyes
    moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimly lighted
    objects. Just as your headlamps should be checked
    regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes be
    examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from night
    blindness — the inability to see in dim
    light — and are not even aware of it.

    Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet
    road, you cannot stop, accelerate, or turn as well
    because your tire-to-road traction is not as good as on dry
    roads. And, if your tires do not have much tread left, you
    will get even less traction. It is always wise to go slower
    and be cautious if rain starts to fall while you are driving.
    The surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexes
    are tuned for driving on dry pavement.

    4-15

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 224

    The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your
    windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy rain
    can make it harder to see road signs and traffic signals,
    pavement markings, the edge of the road, and even
    people walking.
    It is wise to keep your wiping equipment in good shape
    and keep your windshield washer tank filled with
    washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper inserts
    when they show signs of streaking or missing areas
    on the windshield, or when strips of rubber start
    to separate from the inserts.
    Driving too fast through large water puddles or even
    going through some car washes can cause problems,
    too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid
    puddles. But if you cannot, try to slow down before
    you hit them.

    {CAUTION:
    Wet brakes can cause accidents. They will not
    work as well in a quick stop and may cause
    pulling to one side. You could lose control of
    the vehicle.
    After driving through a large puddle of water
    or a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly
    until your brakes work normally.

    4-16

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 225

    Hydroplaning
    Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up
    under your tires that they can actually ride on the
    water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and
    you are going fast enough. When your vehicle is
    hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.
    Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can if your
    tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in
    one or more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is
    standing on the road. If you can see reflections
    from trees, telephone poles, or other vehicles, and
    raindrops dimple the water’s surface, there could be
    hydroplaning.
    Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds.
    There just is not a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
    The best advice is to slow down when it is raining.

    Driving Through Deep Standing Water
    Notice: If you drive too quickly through deep
    puddles or standing water, water can come in
    through your engine’s air intake and badly damage
    your engine. Never drive through water that is
    slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle.
    If you cannot avoid deep puddles or standing water,
    drive through them very slowly.

    Driving Through Flowing Water

    {CAUTION:
    Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.
    If you try to drive through flowing water, as you
    might at a low water crossing, your vehicle can
    be carried away. As little as six inches of
    flowing water can carry away a smaller vehicle.
    If this happens, you and other vehicle
    occupants could drown. Do not ignore police
    warning signs, and otherwise be very cautious
    about trying to drive through flowing water.

    Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
    • Besides slowing down, allow some extra following
    distance. And be especially careful when you
    pass another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear
    room ahead, and be prepared to have your
    view restricted by road spray.

    • Have good tires with proper tread depth.
    See Tires on page 5-54.

    4-17

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 226

    City Driving

    Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:

    • Know the best way to get to where you are
    going. Get a city map and plan your trip into
    an unknown part of the city just as you would
    for a cross-country trip.

    • Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross
    most large cities. You will save time and energy.
    See Freeway Driving on page 4-19.

    • Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic
    light is there because the corner is busy enough
    to need it. When a light turns green, and just before
    you start to move, check both ways for vehicles
    that have not cleared the intersection or may
    be running the red light.

    One of the biggest problems with city streets is the
    amount of traffic on them. You will want to watch out
    for what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to
    traffic signals.

    4-18

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 227

    Freeway Driving

    The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep
    up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the
    same speed most of the other drivers are driving.
    Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow.
    Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.
    At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to the
    freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as you
    drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin to check
    traffic. Try to determine where you expect to blend with
    the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close to the
    prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal, check your
    mirrors, and glance over your shoulder as often as
    necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.
    Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to
    the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it is slower.
    Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass.
    Before changing lanes, check your mirrors.
    Then use your turn signal.

    Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways, parkways,
    expressways, turnpikes, or superhighways — are the
    safest of all roads. But they have their own special rules.

    Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your
    shoulder to make sure there is not another vehicle in
    your blind spot.

    4-19

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 228

    Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain
    you allow a reasonable following distance. Expect
    to move slightly slower at night.
    When you want to leave the freeway, move to the
    proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit,
    do not, under any circumstances, stop and back up.
    Drive on to the next exit.

    Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
    serviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it needs
    service, have it done before starting out. Of course,
    you will find experienced and able service experts
    in dealerships all across North America. They will be
    ready and willing to help if you need it.
    Here are some things you can check before a trip:

    The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
    The exit speed is usually posted.

    • Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full?

    Reduce your speed according to your speedometer,
    not to your sense of motion. After driving for any
    distance at higher speeds, you may tend to think you
    are going slower than you actually are.

    • Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
    • Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked

    Before Leaving on a Long Trip
    Make sure you are ready. Try to be well rested. If you
    must start when you are not fresh — such as after
    a day’s work — do not plan to make too many miles that
    first part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing
    and shoes you can easily drive in.

    Are all windows clean inside and outside?

    all levels?

    • Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
    • Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
    trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for
    long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the
    recommended pressure?

    • Weather Forecasts: What is the weather outlook
    along your route? Should you delay your trip a
    short time to avoid a major storm system?

    • Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?

    4-20

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 229

    Highway Hypnosis
    Is there actually such a condition as highway hypnosis?
    Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Call it
    highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or whatever.
    There is something about an easy stretch of road with the
    same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the
    road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of the wind
    against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Do not let it
    happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can leave the road
    in less than a second, and you could crash and be
    injured.

    Then here are some tips:

    • Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated,
    with a comfortably cool interior.

    • Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead
    and to the sides. Check your mirrors and your
    instruments frequently.

    • If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,
    service, or parking area and take a nap, get some
    exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness
    on the highway as an emergency.

    What can you do about highway hypnosis?
    First, be aware that it can happen.

    4-21

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 230

    Hill and Mountain Roads

    If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you are
    planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make
    your trips safer and more enjoyable.

    • Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid
    levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system,
    and transmission. These parts can work hard
    on mountain roads.

    • Know how to go down hills. The most important
    thing to know is this: let your engine do some of
    the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go
    down a steep or long hill.

    {CAUTION:

    Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from
    driving in flat or rolling terrain.

    If you do not shift down, your brakes could get
    so hot that they would not work well. You
    would then have poor braking or even none
    going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down
    to let your engine assist your brakes on a
    steep downhill slope.

    4-22

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 231

    • Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane

    {CAUTION:
    Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the
    ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have
    to do all the work of slowing down. They could
    get so hot that they would not work well. You
    would then have poor braking or even none
    going down a hill. You could crash. Always
    have your engine running and your vehicle in
    gear when you go downhill.

    roads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wide
    or cut across the center of the road. Drive at speeds
    that let you stay in your own lane.

    • As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There
    could be something in your lane, like a stalled car
    or an accident.

    • You may see highway signs on mountains that warn
    of special problems. Examples are long grades,
    passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocks area,
    or winding roads. Be alert to these and take
    appropriate action.

    • Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down
    to a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your
    engine and transmission, and you can climb the
    hill better.

    4-23

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 232

    Winter Driving

    Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a supply
    of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter outer
    clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red cloth, and
    reflective warning triangles. And, if you will be driving
    under severe conditions, include a small bag of sand,
    a piece of old carpet, or a couple of burlap bags to help
    provide traction. Be sure you properly secure these items
    in your vehicle.

    Driving on Snow or Ice
    Most of the time, those places where your tires meet
    the road probably have good traction.
    However, if there is snow or ice between your tires and
    the road, you can have a very slippery situation. You
    will have a lot less traction, or grip, and will need to be
    very careful.

    Here are some tips for winter driving:

    • Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
    • You may want to put winter emergency supplies in
    your vehicle.
    Also see Tires on page 5-54.

    4-24

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 233

    Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowing,
    or loose snow — drive with caution.
    Accelerate gently. Try not to break the fragile traction.
    If you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin and
    polish the surface under the tires even more.
    Your anti-lock brake system (ABS) improves your
    vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop on a
    slippery road. Even though you have ABS, you will
    want to begin stopping sooner than you would on dry
    pavement. See Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
    on page 4-6.

    • Allow greater following distance on any
    slippery road.

    • Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
    What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold snow
    or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet ice
    can be even more trouble because it may offer the least
    traction of all. You can get wet ice when it is about
    freezing, 32°F (0°C), and freezing rain begins to fall.
    Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews
    can get there.

    until you hit a spot that is covered with ice. On an
    otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in
    shaded areas where the sun cannot reach, such as
    around clumps of trees, behind buildings, or under
    bridges. Sometimes the surface of a curve or an
    overpass may remain icy when the surrounding
    roads are clear. If you see a patch of ice ahead of
    you, brake before you are on it. Try not to brake
    while you are actually on the ice, and avoid sudden
    steering maneuvers.

    4-25

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 234

    If You Are Caught in a Blizzard
    If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
    serious situation. You should probably stay with
    your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near
    help and you can hike through the snow. Here are
    some things to do to summon help and keep yourself
    and your passengers safe:

    • Turn on your hazard flashers.
    • Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
    you have been stopped by the snow.

    • Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
    If you do not have blankets or extra clothing, make
    body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags,
    rags, floor mats — anything you can wrap around
    yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
    You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.

    4-26

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 235

    {CAUTION:
    Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
    vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon
    monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could
    overcome you and kill you. You cannot see it
    or smell it, so you might not know it is in your
    vehicle. Clear away snow from around the
    base of your vehicle, especially any that is
    blocking your exhaust pipe. And check around
    again from time to time to be sure snow does
    not collect there.

    Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
    fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little faster
    than just idle. That is, push the accelerator slightly. This
    uses less fuel for the heat that you get and it keeps the
    battery charged. You will need a well-charged battery to
    restart the vehicle, and possibly for signaling later on with
    your headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.
    Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost all
    the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine again and
    repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable from
    the cold. But do it as little as possible. Preserve the fuel
    as long as you can. To help keep warm, you can get out
    of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises
    every half hour or so until help comes.

    Open a window just a little on the side of the
    vehicle that is away from the wind. This will
    help keep CO out.

    4-27

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 236

    If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
    Mud, Ice or Snow
    In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you will need
    to spin the wheels, but you do not want to spin your
    wheels too fast. The method known as rocking can help
    you get out when you are stuck, but you must use
    caution.

    {CAUTION:
    If you let your tires spin at high speed, they can
    explode, and you or others could be injured.
    And, the transmission or other parts of the
    vehicle can overheat. That could cause an
    engine compartment fire or other damage.
    When you are stuck, spin the wheels as little as
    possible. Do not spin the wheels above 35 mph
    (55 km/h) as shown on the speedometer.

    Notice: Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of
    your vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the
    wheels too fast while shifting your transmission
    back and forth, you can destroy your transmission.
    For more information about using tire chains on your
    vehicle, see Tire Chains on page 5-68.

    Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
    First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That will clear
    the area around your front wheels. Then shift back and
    forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward gear,
    spinning the wheels as little as possible. Release the
    accelerator pedal while you shift, and press lightly on the
    accelerator pedal when the transmission is in gear.
    By slowly spinning your wheels in the forward and
    reverse directions, you will cause a rocking motion that
    may free your vehicle. If that does not get you out after a
    few tries, you may need to be towed out. If you do need to
    be towed out, see Towing Your Vehicle on page 4-34.

    4-28

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 237

    Loading Your Vehicle

    Tire and Loading Information Label

    It is very important to know how much weight your
    vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle
    capacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants,
    cargo and all nonfactory-installed options. Two labels
    on your vehicle show how much weight it was designed
    to carry, the Tire and Loading Information label and
    the Certification/Tire label.

    {CAUTION:
    Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
    Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either
    the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight
    Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on your
    vehicle can break, and it can change the way
    your vehicle handles. These could cause you
    to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
    can shorten the life of your vehicle.

    Label Example
    A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information label is
    attached to the center pillar (B-pillar). With the driver’s
    door open, you will find the label attached below the door
    lock post (striker). The tire and loading information label
    shows the number of occupant seating positions (A), and
    the maximum vehicle capacity weight (B) in kilograms
    and pounds.
    The Tire and Loading Information label also shows the
    size of the original equipment tires (C) and the
    recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D). For more
    information on tires and inflation see Tires on page 5-54
    and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-60.
    4-29

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 238

    There is also important loading information on the
    vehicle Certification/Tire label. It tells you the Gross
    Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross
    Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle.
    See “Certification/Tire Label” later in this section.

    Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit

    6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load from
    your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.
    Consult this manual to determine how this reduces
    the available cargo and luggage load capacity of
    your vehicle. See Towing a Trailer on page 4-35 for
    important information on towing a trailer, towing
    safety rules and trailering tips.

    1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of
    occupants and cargo should never exceed
    XXX kg or XXX pounds” on your vehicle’s placard.
    2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
    passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
    3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
    passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.
    4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
    cargo and luggage load capacity. For example,
    if the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs and there will
    be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle,
    the amount of available cargo and luggage load
    capacity is 650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
    5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
    and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight
    may not safely exceed the available cargo and
    luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.

    Example 1
    Item
    A
    B
    C

    Description
    Vehicle Capacity Weight
    for Example 1 =
    Subtract Occupant
    Weight 150 lbs
    (68 kg) × 2 =
    Available Occupant and
    Cargo Weight =

    Total
    1,000 lbs (453 kg)
    300 lbs (136 kg)
    700 lbs (317 kg)

    4-30

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 239

    Example 2
    Item
    A
    B
    C

    Description
    Vehicle Capacity Weight
    for Example 2 =
    Subtract Occupant
    Weight 150 lbs
    (68 kg) × 5 =
    Available Cargo
    Weight =

    Example 3
    Total

    Item

    1,000 lbs (453 kg)

    A

    750 lbs (136 kg)

    B

    250 lbs (113 kg)

    C

    Description
    Vehicle Capacity Weight
    for Example 3 =
    Subtract Occupant
    Weight 200 lbs
    (91 kg) × 5 =
    Available Cargo
    Weight =

    Total
    1,000 lbs (453 kg)
    1000 lbs (453 kg)
    0 lbs (0 kg)

    Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information label
    for specific information about your vehicle’s capacity
    weight and seating positions. The combined weight of
    the driver, passengers and cargo should never
    exceed your vehicle’s capacity weight.

    4-31

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 240

    Certification/Tire Label

    The Certification/Tire label also tells you the maximum
    weights for the front and rear axles, called Gross
    Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). To find out the actual loads
    on your front and rear axles, you need to go to a
    weigh station and weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can
    help you with this. Be sure to spread out your load
    equally on both sides of the centerline.
    Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the GAWR
    for either the front or rear axle.
    And, if you do have a heavy load, you should spread
    it out.
    Similar appearing vehicles may have different GVWRs
    and capacity weights. Please note your vehicle’s
    Certification/Tire label or consult your dealer for
    additional details.

    A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is found on the
    rear edge of the driver’s door. The label shows the
    size of your vehicle’s original tires and the inflation
    pressures needed to obtain the gross weight capacity of
    your vehicle. This is called Gross Vehicle Weight
    Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of the
    vehicle, all occupants, fuel, cargo and trailer tongue
    weight, if pulling a trailer.

    4-32

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 241

    {CAUTION:

    {CAUTION:

    Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
    Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either
    the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight
    Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on your
    vehicle can break, and it can change the way
    your vehicle handles. These could cause you
    to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
    can shorten the life of your vehicle.

    Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
    and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or
    in a crash.
    • Put things in the cargo area of your
    vehicle. Try to spread the weight evenly.
    • Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
    inside the vehicle so that some of them
    are above the tops of the seats.
    • Do not leave an unsecured child restraint
    in your vehicle.
    • When you carry something inside the
    vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
    • Do not leave a seat folded down unless
    you need to.

    Using heavier suspension components to get
    added durability might not change your vehicle’s
    weight ratings. Ask your dealer to help you load
    your vehicle the right way.
    Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
    damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
    warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
    If you put things inside your vehicle like suitcases, tools,
    packages, or anything else they will go as fast as the
    vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn quickly,
    or if there is a crash, they will keep going.

    4-33

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 242

    Towing
    Towing Your Vehicle
    Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if
    you need to have your disabled vehicle towed.
    See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-4.
    If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle
    for recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),
    see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.

    Recreational Vehicle Towing
    Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle
    behind another vehicle — such as behind a motorhome.
    The two most common types of recreational vehicle
    towing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing your vehicle
    with all four wheels on the ground) and “dolly towing”
    (towing your vehicle with two wheels on the ground and
    two wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”).
    Your vehicle was not designed to be towed with any of
    its wheels on the ground. If your vehicle must be
    towed, see “Towing Your Vehicle” earlier in this section.
    Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drive vehicle with all
    four wheels on the ground, or even with only two of
    its wheels on the ground, will damage drivetrain
    components. Do not tow an all-wheel-drive vehicle if
    any of its wheels will be on the ground.

    Electronically Controlled Air
    Suspension System
    Your vehicle is equipped with an electronically controlled
    air suspension system that automatically keeps your
    vehicle level as you load and unload. The system
    includes a compressor, two height sensors, and two air
    springs supporting the rear axle.
    The system also has an internal clock to prevent
    overheating. If the system overheats, all leveling function
    stops until the system cools down. During this time, the
    indicator light on the air inflator system will be flashing.
    The ignition has to be on for the system to inflate, in
    order to raise the vehicle to the standard ride height
    after loading. The system can lower the vehicle to the
    standard ride height after unloading with the ignition
    on and also for up to 30 minutes after the ignition has
    been turned off.
    You may hear the compressor operating when you load
    your vehicle, and periodically as the system adjusts
    the vehicle to the standard ride height.
    Load leveling will not function normally with the inflator
    hose attached to the inflator outlet. Remove the inflator
    hose from the outlet during loading and unloading.
    If the vehicle is parked for an extended period of time,
    some bleed down of the suspension is normal. Upon
    starting the vehicle, proper height will be achieved.

    4-34

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 243

    Overload Protection
    The air suspension system is equipped with overload
    protection. Overload protection is designed to protect the
    air suspension system, and it is an indicator to the
    driver that the vehicle is overloaded. When the overload
    protection mode is on, it will not allow damage to the
    air compressor. However, do not overload the vehicle.
    See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-29.
    If the suspension remains at a low height, the rear axle
    load has exceeded GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating).
    When the overload protection mode is activated, the
    compressor operates for about 30 seconds to one minute
    without raising the vehicle depending on the amount of
    overload. This will continue each time the ignition is
    turned on until the rear axle load is reduced
    below GAWR.

    Indicator Light
    The indicator light on the inflator switch in the rear
    passenger compartment also serves as an indicator for
    internal system error. If the indicator light is flashing
    without the load leveling function or the inflator being
    active, turn off the ignition. The next day turn on
    the ignition and check the indicator light. The vehicle
    can be driven with the light flashing, but if it is you
    should have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible.

    Towing a Trailer

    {CAUTION:
    If you do not use the correct equipment and
    drive properly, you can lose control when you
    pull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is too
    heavy, the brakes may not work well — or even
    at all. You and your passengers could be
    seriously injured. Pull a trailer only if you have
    followed all the steps in this section. Ask your
    dealer for advice and information about towing
    a trailer with your vehicle.
    Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly can damage
    your vehicle and result in costly repairs that would
    not be covered by your warranty. Always follow
    the instructions in this section and check with your
    dealer for more information about towing a trailer
    with your vehicle.
    To identify the trailering capacity of your vehicle, you
    should read the information in “Weight of the Trailer” that
    appears later in this section.

    4-35

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 244

    Trailering is different than just driving your vehicle by
    itself. Trailering means changes in acceleration, braking,
    handling, durability and fuel economy. Successful,
    safe trailering takes correct equipment, and it has to be
    used properly.
    That’s the reason for this part. In it are many time-tested,
    important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of
    these are important for your safety and that of your
    passengers. So please read this section carefully before
    you pull a trailer.

    If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer
    If you do, here are some important points:

    • There are many different laws, including speed limit
    restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
    your rig will be legal, not only where you live
    but also where you’ll be driving. A good source for
    this information can be state or provincial police.

    • Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
    (800 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine,
    axle or other parts could be damaged.

    • Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you
    tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
    and don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps your
    engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at
    the heavier loads.

    • You can tow in DRIVE (D). You may want to shift the
    transmission to THIRD (3) or, if necessary, a lower
    gear selection if the transmission shifts too often
    (e.g., under heavy loads and/or hilly conditions).
    Three important considerations have to do with weight:

    • the weight of the trailer,
    • the weight of the trailer tongue
    • and the weight on your vehicle’s tires.

    • Consider using a sway control. See “Hitches” later
    in this section.

    4-36

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 245

    Weight of the Trailer
    How heavy can a trailer safely be?
    It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside temperature and how
    much your vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all important. And, it can also depend on any special equipment that
    you have on your vehicle.
    Vehicle
    AWD (L6 Engine)
    AWD (V8 Engine)

    Axle Ratio
    3.73
    3.73

    The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the
    total allowable weight of the completely loaded
    vehicle and trailer including any passengers, cargo,
    equipment and conversion. The GCWR for your vehicle
    should not be exceeded.

    Max.Trailer Wt.
    5,500 lbs (2 495 kg)
    6,500 lbs (2 948 kg)

    *GCWR
    10,500 lbs (4 763 kg)
    11,500 lbs (5 216 kg)

    In Canada, write to:
    General Motors of Canada Limited
    Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
    1908 Colonel Sam Drive
    Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

    You can ask your dealer for our trailering information
    or advice, or you can write us at the address listed
    in your Warranty and Owner Assistance Information
    Booklet.

    4-37

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 246

    Weight of the Trailer Tongue
    The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
    to measure because it affects the total or gross weight
    of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)
    includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you
    may carry in it, and the people who will be riding in
    the vehicle. If you have a lot of options, equipment,
    passengers or cargo in your vehicle, it will reduce the
    tongue weight your vehicle can carry, which will
    also reduce the trailer weight your vehicle can tow.
    And if you will tow a trailer, you must add the tongue
    load to the GVW because your vehicle will be carrying
    that weight, too. See Loading Your Vehicle on
    page 4-29 for more information about your vehicle’s
    maximum load capacity.

    The trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percent to
    15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight, up to
    a maximum or 400 lbs (181 kg) with a weight carrying
    hitch. The trailer tongue weight (A) should be
    10 to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight,
    up to a maximum of 900 lbs (408 kg) with a weight
    distributing hitch.
    Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue weight
    for your vehicle. Choose the shortest hitch extension
    that will position the hitch ball closest to the vehicle.
    This will help reduce the effect of trailer tongue weight
    on the rear axle.
    After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and then
    the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are proper.
    If they aren’t, you may be able to get them right simply by
    moving some items around in the trailer.

    4-38

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 247

    Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
    Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limit
    for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on the
    Certification label at the rear edge of the driver’s door or
    see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-29 for more
    information. Then be sure you don’t go over the GVW
    limit for your vehicle, or the GAWR, including the weight
    of the trailer tongue. If you use a weight distributing hitch,
    make sure you don’t go over the rear axle limit before you
    apply the weight distribution spring bars.

    Weight Distributing Hitches and Weight
    Carrying Hitches

    Hitches
    It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.
    Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are
    a few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch.
    (A) Body to Ground Distance, (B) Front of Vehicle
    When using a weight-distributing hitch, the hitch must
    be adjusted so the distance (A) remains the same both
    before and after coupling the trailer to the tow vehicle.

    4-39

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 248

    If you will be pulling a trailer that, when loaded, will
    weigh more than 4,000 lbs (1 814 kg) be sure to use a
    properly mounted weight-distributing hitch and sway
    control of the proper size. This equipment is very
    important for proper vehicle loading and good handling
    when driving. Always use a sway control if the trailer
    will weigh more than these limits. You can ask a
    hitch dealer about sway controls.

    Safety Chains
    You should always attach chains between your vehicle
    and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue
    of the trailer to help prevent the tongue from contacting
    the road if it becomes separated from the hitch.
    Instructions about safety chains may be provided by the
    hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer. Follow
    the manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching safety
    chains and do not attach them to the bumper. Always
    leave just enough slack so you can turn with your rig.
    Never allow safety chains to drag on the ground.

    Trailer Brakes
    If your trailer weighs more than 1,500 lbs (680 kg)
    loaded, then it needs its own brakes — and they must
    be adequate. Be sure to read and follow the instructions
    for the trailer brakes so you’ll be able to install, adjust
    and maintain them properly.
    Your trailer’s brake system can tap into the vehicle’s
    hydraulic brake system only if:

    • The trailer parts can withstand
    3,000 psi (20 650 kPa) of pressure.

    • The trailer’s brake system will use less than
    0.02 cubic inch (0.3 cc) of fluid from your vehicle’s
    master cylinder. Otherwise, both braking systems
    won’t work well. You could even lose your brakes.
    If everything checks out this far, then make the brake
    fluid tap at the port on the master cylinder that
    sends fluid to the rear brakes. But don’t use copper
    tubing for this. If you do, it will bend and finally break off.
    Use steel brake tubing.

    4-40

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 249

    Driving with a Trailer

    {CAUTION:
    If you have a rear-most window open and you
    pull a trailer with your vehicle, carbon
    monoxide (CO) could come into your vehicle.
    You cannot see or smell CO. It can cause
    unconsciousness or death. See Engine
    Exhaust on page 2-30. To maximize your safety
    when towing a trailer:
    • Have your exhaust system inspected for
    leaks, and make necessary repairs before
    starting on your trip.
    • Keep the rear-most windows closed.
    • If exhaust does come into your vehicle
    through a window in the rear or another
    opening, drive with your front, main
    heating or cooling system on and with the
    fan on any speed. This will bring fresh,
    outside air into your vehicle. Do not use
    the climate control setting for maximum air
    because it only recirculates the air inside
    your vehicle. See Dual Automatic Climate
    Control System on page 3-20.

    Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
    Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to get to
    know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of handling
    and braking with the added weight of the trailer. And
    always keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is
    now a good deal longer and not nearly as responsive as
    your vehicle is by itself.
    Before you start, check all trailer hitch parts and
    attachments, safety chains, electrical connection, lamps,
    tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has electric
    brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and then
    apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure the
    brakes are working. This lets you check your electrical
    connection at the same time.
    During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that
    the load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer
    brakes are still working.

    Following Distance
    Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
    you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer.
    This can help you avoid situations that require
    heavy braking and sudden turns.

    Passing
    You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when
    you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good
    deal longer, you’ll need to go much farther beyond the
    passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.
    4-41

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 250

    Backing Up
    Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
    Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand
    to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
    hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,
    have someone guide you.

    Making Turns
    Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering
    could cause the trailer to come in contact with the
    vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged.
    Avoid making very sharp turns while trailering.
    When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns than
    normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike soft shoulders,
    curbs, road signs, trees or other objects. Avoid jerky or
    sudden maneuvers. Signal well in advance.

    Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
    The arrows on your instrument panel will flash whenever
    you signal a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up,
    the trailer lamps will also flash, telling other drivers
    you’re about to turn, change lanes or stop.

    When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument
    panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer
    are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind
    you are seeing your signal when they are not.
    It’s important to check occasionally to be sure the
    trailer bulbs are still working.

    Driving On Grades
    Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start
    down a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t shift
    down, you might have to use your brakes so much that
    they would get hot and no longer work well.
    You can tow in DRIVE (D). You may want to shift the
    transmission to THIRD (3) or a lower gear, under heavy
    loads or hilly conditions.
    When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades,
    consider the following: Engine coolant will boil at a lower
    temperature than at normal altitudes. If you turn your
    engine off immediately after towing at high altitude
    on steep uphill grades, your vehicle may show signs
    similar to engine overheating. To avoid this, let the
    engine run while parked (preferably on level ground)
    with the automatic transmission in PARK (P) for a
    few minutes before turning the engine off. If you do
    get the overheat warning, see Engine Overheating
    on page 5-25.

    4-42

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 251

    Parking on Hills

    {CAUTION:
    You really should not park your vehicle, with a
    trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes
    wrong, your rig could start to move. People
    can be injured, and both your vehicle and the
    trailer can be damaged.

    When You Are Ready to Leave After
    Parking on a Hill
    1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down
    while you:

    • start your engine,
    • shift into a gear, and
    • release the parking brake.
    2. Let up on the brake pedal.
    3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.

    But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’s
    how to do it:
    1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into
    PARK (P) yet. When parking uphill, turn your wheels
    away from the curb. When parking downhill, turn
    your wheels into the curb.
    2. Have someone place chocks under the
    trailer wheels.
    3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
    regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
    4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your
    parking brake, and then shift into PARK (P).
    5. Release the regular brakes.

    4. Stop and have someone pick up and store
    the chocks.

    Maintenance When Trailer Towing
    Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re
    pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for more
    on this. Things that are especially important in trailer
    operation are automatic transmission fluid (don’t overfill),
    engine oil, axle lubricant, belt(s), cooling system and
    brake system. Each of these is covered in this manual,
    and the Index will help you find them quickly. If you’re
    trailering, it’s a good idea to review these sections before
    you start your trip.
    Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
    are tight.

    4-43

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 252

    Trailer Wiring Harness

    The seven-wire harness contains the following
    trailer circuits:









    Your vehicle is equipped with a seven-wire trailer towing
    harness. This harness has a seven-pin universal
    heavy-duty trailer connector that is attached to a bracket
    on the hitch platform.

    Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal
    Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn Signal
    Brown: Running Lamps
    White: Ground
    Light Green: Back-up Lamps
    Dark Blue: Electric Brakes
    Red: Battery Feed (The chassis wiring ring terminal
    must be fastened to a stud on the underhood
    electrical center before the trailer feed will
    become active.)

    If you need to tow a light-duty trailer with a standard
    four-way round pin connector, an adapter connector is
    available from your dealer.
    Your vehicle is also equipped with wiring for an electric
    trailer brake controller. These wires are located
    inside the vehicle on the driver’s side under the
    instrument panel. These wires should be connected to
    an electric trailer brake controller by your dealer or
    a qualified service center.

    4-44

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 253

    Section 5

    Service and Appearance Care

    Service ............................................................5-3
    Doing Your Own Service Work .........................5-3
    Adding Equipment to the Outside
    of Your Vehicle ...........................................5-4
    Fuel ................................................................5-4
    Gasoline Octane ............................................5-4
    Gasoline Specifications ....................................5-4
    California Fuel ...............................................5-4
    Additives .......................................................5-5
    Fuels in Foreign Countries ...............................5-5
    Filling the Tank ..............................................5-6
    Filling a Portable Fuel Container .......................5-8
    Checking Things Under the Hood .....................5-8
    Hood Release ................................................5-9
    Engine Compartment Overview .......................5-10
    Engine Oil ...................................................5-14
    Engine Oil Life System ..................................5-17
    Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ................................5-19
    Automatic Transmission Fluid .........................5-20
    Engine Coolant .............................................5-22
    Radiator Pressure Cap ..................................5-25
    Engine Overheating .......................................5-25

    Cooling System ............................................5-27
    Engine Fan Noise .........................................5-32
    Power Steering Fluid .....................................5-33
    Windshield Washer Fluid ................................5-34
    Brakes ........................................................5-35
    Battery ........................................................5-38
    Jump Starting ...............................................5-39
    All-Wheel Drive ..............................................5-44
    Rear Axle .......................................................5-45
    Front Axle ......................................................5-46
    Headlamp Aiming ...........................................5-47
    Bulb Replacement ..........................................5-47
    High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting ............5-47
    Halogen Bulbs ..............................................5-48
    Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker,
    and Parking Lamps ....................................5-48
    Taillamps, Turn Signal, Sidemarker,
    Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps ...................5-50
    Replacement Bulbs .......................................5-51
    Windshield Replacement .................................5-51
    Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ..............5-51

    5-1

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 254

    Section 5

    Service and Appearance Care

    Tires ..............................................................5-54
    Tire Sidewall Labelling ...................................5-55
    Tire Terminology and Definitions .....................5-58
    Inflation - Tire Pressure .................................5-60
    Tire Inspection and Rotation ...........................5-62
    When It Is Time for New Tires .......................5-63
    Buying New Tires .........................................5-64
    Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..........................5-65
    Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ..................5-66
    Wheel Replacement ......................................5-66
    Tire Chains ..................................................5-68
    Accessory Inflator .........................................5-68
    If a Tire Goes Flat ........................................5-70
    Changing a Flat Tire .....................................5-71
    Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................5-72
    Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
    Spare Tire ................................................5-74
    Secondary Latch System ...............................5-79
    Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ............5-82
    Spare Tire ...................................................5-84
    Appearance Care ............................................5-85
    Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .................5-85
    Fabric/Carpet ...............................................5-87
    Leather .......................................................5-87
    Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic
    Surfaces ..................................................5-88

    Care of Safety Belts ......................................5-88
    Weatherstrips ...............................................5-88
    Washing Your Vehicle ...................................5-89
    Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .....................5-89
    Finish Care ..................................................5-89
    Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper Blades .........5-90
    Aluminum Wheels .........................................5-91
    Tires ...........................................................5-91
    Sheet Metal Damage .....................................5-92
    Finish Damage .............................................5-92
    Underbody Maintenance ................................5-92
    Chemical Paint Spotting .................................5-92
    Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ..................5-93
    Vehicle Identification ......................................5-94
    Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .................5-94
    Service Parts Identification Label .....................5-94
    Electrical System ............................................5-94
    Add-On Electrical Equipment ..........................5-94
    Headlamps ..................................................5-95
    Windshield Wiper Fuses ................................5-95
    Power Windows and Other Power Options .......5-95
    Fuses and Circuit Breakers ............................5-95
    Engine Compartment Fuse Block ....................5-95
    Rear Underseat Fuse Block ..........................5-103
    Capacities and Specifications ........................5-106

    5-2

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 255

    Service
    Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to
    be happy with it. We hope you will go to your dealer
    for all your service and parts needs.

    California Proposition 65 Warning
    Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
    emit chemicals known to the State of California to
    cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
    harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems
    (including some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and
    some component wear by-products contain and/or emit
    these chemicals.

    Doing Your Own Service Work
    If you want to do some of your own service work,
    you will want to use the proper service manual. It tells
    you much more about how to service your vehicle
    than this manual can.

    You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list
    the mileage and the date of any service work you
    perform. See Maintenance Record on page 6-15.

    {CAUTION:
    You can be injured and your vehicle could be
    damaged if you try to do service work on a
    vehicle without knowing enough about it.
    • Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
    experience, the proper replacement parts,
    and tools before you attempt any vehicle
    maintenance task.
    • Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts,
    and other fasteners. English and metric
    fasteners can be easily confused. If you
    use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
    break or fall off. You could be hurt.

    Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting
    to do your own service work, see Servicing Your
    Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-58.

    5-3

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 256

    Adding Equipment to the Outside
    of Your Vehicle
    Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle
    can affect the airflow around it. This may cause
    wind noise and affect windshield washer performance.
    Check with your dealer before adding equipment to
    the outside of your vehicle.

    Fuel
    Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the
    proper maintenance of your vehicle.

    Gasoline Octane
    Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
    of 87 or higher. If the octane is less than 87, you may
    get a heavy knocking noise when you drive. If this
    occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as
    soon as possible. Otherwise, you might damage
    your engine. A little pinging noise when you accelerate
    or drive uphill is considered normal. This does not
    indicate a problem exists or that a higher-octane fuel is
    necessary. If you are using 87 octane or higher-octane
    fuel and hear heavy knocking, your engine needs
    service.

    Gasoline Specifications
    It is recommended that gasoline meet specifications
    which were developed by automobile manufacturers
    around the world and contained in the World-Wide Fuel
    Charter which is available from the Alliance of Automobile
    Manufacturers at www.autoalliance.org/fuel_charter.htm.
    Gasoline meeting these specifications could provide
    improved driveability and emission control system
    performance compared to other gasoline.

    California Fuel
    If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions
    Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that meet
    California specifications. See the underhood emission
    control label. If this fuel is not available in states
    adopting California emissions standards, your vehicle
    will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal
    specifications, but emission control system performance
    may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may
    turn on and your vehicle may fail a smog-check test.
    See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-35.
    If this occurs, return to your authorized dealer for
    diagnosis. If it is determined that the condition is caused
    by the type of fuel used, repairs may not be covered
    by your warranty.

    5-4

    2005 - Saab 97X Owner Manual



  • Page 257

    Additives
    To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
    are now required to contain additives that will help
    prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming,
    allowing your emission control system to work
    properly. In most cases, you should not have to add
    anything to your fuel. However, some gasolines contain
    only the minimum amount of additive required to
    meet U.S. Environmental Protection Agency regulations.
    We recommend that you buy gasolines that are
    advertised to help keep fuel injectors and intake valves
    clean. If your vehicle experiences problems due to
    dirty injectors or valves, try a different brand of gasoline.
    Also, your dealer has additives that will help correct
    and prevent most deposit-related problems.
    Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
    ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be available in
    your area to contribute to clean air. We recommend
    that you use these gasolines, particularly if they comply
    with the specifications described earlier.
    Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
    contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
    methanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel
    system and also damage the plastic and rubber
    parts. That damage would not be covered under
    your warranty.

    Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
    emissions may contain an octane-enhancing additive
    called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
    (MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
    whether the fuel contains MMT. We do not recommend
    the use of such gasolines. Fuels containing MMT
    can reduce the life of spark plugs and the performance
    of the emission control system may be affected.
    The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on. If this
    occurs, return to your authori